Upload
adrian-dumitru
View
176
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Autodesk Civil 3D 2007
Subassembly Reference
April 2006
Copyright© 2006 Autodesk, Inc.All Rights ReservedThis publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANYIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESEMATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS.THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOTEXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of theproduct at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December,3December.com, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, AEC-X, Alias, Alias (swirldesign/logo), Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, AutodeskInventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP,AutoSketch, Backdraft, Bringing information down to earth, Buzzsaw, CAD Overlay, Can You Imagine, Character Studio,Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Civil 3D, Cleaner, Combustion, Create>what’s>Next (design/logo), DesignStudio, Design|Studio(design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), EditDV, Education by Design, FBX, Filmbox, Gmax, Heidi,HOOPS, i-drop, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, ObjectARX, Open Reality,PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), ProjectPoint, RadioRay, Reactor, Revit, SketchBook, Visual, VisualConstruction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat,Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCADSimulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, CAiCE,Cinestream, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, DesignDoctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWFit, DWG Linking, DWGTrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, Gmax (logo), Gmax ready (logo), Heads-upDesign, HumanIK, Incinerator, jobnet, LocationLogic, MotionBuilder, ObjectDBX, Plasma, PolarSnap, Productstream, RealDWG,Real-time Roto, Render Queue, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Wiretap.
Autodesk Canada Co.TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Discreet,Fire, Flame, Flint, Flint RT, Frost, Glass, Inferno, MountStone, Riot, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Stream, Vapour, Wire.The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: Backburner, Multi-MasterEditing.
Third Party TrademarksAll other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program CreditsACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc.HLM is a trademark of D-Cubed Ltd. HLM © Copyright D-Cubed Ltd. 1996-2004.AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2005 Vantage Software Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.Portions Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.Libpng is copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson.Libtiff is Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler And Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.Active Delivery™ 2.0. © 1999-2004 Inner Media, Inc. All rights reserved.Produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide ® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright ©
Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Inkand Chemicals, Inc.International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.Macromedia ® and Flash ® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States orother countries.
PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identifiedstandards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002.Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for useonly in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied ontoanother disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnunge.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.Printed and Help produced with Idiom WorldServer™Portions Copyright © 1996-2006 Macrovision Corporation. All rights reserved.Stingray is Copyright 1995-2005, Quovadx, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Protected by copyright and licenses restricting use,copying, distribution and decompilation. The Rogue Wave name and logo and the Stingray name and logo are either registeredtrademarks or trademarks of Quovadx, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.Xerces is Copyright © 1999-2005, The Apache Software Foundation. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; youmay not use this file except in compliance with the license. You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address:http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numberedTKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute,to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).MrSID image compression format is Copyright © 2005, LizardTech, a division of Celartem,Inc. All rights reserved. MrSIDtechnology is protected by U.S. Patent No 5,710,835 and patents pending.Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc.The OSTN97 coordinate transformation is © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved.The OSTN02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved.The OSGM02 coordinate transformation is © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002.FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.Libcurl is Copyright © 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All rights reserved.The Redland RDF Application Framework is Copyright © 2000-2005 Institute for Learning and Research Technology, Universityof Bristol. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0; you may not use this file except in compliance with the license.You may obtain a copy of the license at the following web address: http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0.GDAL is Copyright © 2000, Frank Warmerdam.
GOVERNMENT USEUse, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (CommercialComputer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Contents
Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Introduction to Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3BasicBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3BasicCurb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5BasicCurbAndGutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8BasicGuardrail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11BasicLane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12BasicLaneTransition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14BasicShoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18BasicSideSlopeCutDitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20BasicSideWalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25BridgeBoxGirder1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28BridgeBoxGirder2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38ChannelParabolicBottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43DaylightBasin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48DaylightBench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54DaylightGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59DaylightMaxOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72DaylightMaxWidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77DaylightMinOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82DaylightMinWidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87DaylightMultiIntercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
v
DaylightStandard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97DaylightToOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108DaylightToROW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111GenericPavementStructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115LaneBrokenBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119LaneFromTaperedMedian1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124LaneFromTaperedMedian2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130LaneInsideSuper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138LaneOutsideSuper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148LaneParabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153LaneTowardCrown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163LinkMulti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165LinkOffsetAndElevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167LinkOffsetAndSlope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169LinkOffsetOnSurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174LinkSlopesBetweenPoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176LinkSlopeToElevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179LinkSlopeToSurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181LinkToMarkedPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184LinkVertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186LinkWidthAndSlope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188MarkPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191MedianDepressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193MedianDepressedShoulderExt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196MedianDepressedShoulderVert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203MedianFlushWithBarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210MedianRaisedConstantSlope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216MedianRaisedWithCrown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227OverlayCrownBetweenEdges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234OverlayMedianAsymmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239OverlayMedianSymmetrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246OverlayMillAndLevel1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251OverlayMillAndLevel2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259OverlayParabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278OverlayWidenWithSuper1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
vi | Contents
RailSingle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293RetainWallTapered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297RetainWallTaperedWide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302RetainWallTieToDitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307RetainWallToLowSide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312RetainWallVertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316ShapeTrapezoidal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321ShoulderExtendAll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325ShoulderExtendSubbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330ShoulderVerticalSubbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336SideDitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341SideDitchUShape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344SideDitchWithLid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348SnapToMarkedPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354StrippingPavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356StrippingTopSoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360TrenchWithPipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362TrenchPipe1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366UrbanCurbGutterGeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369UrbanCurbGutterValley1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373UrbanCurbGutterValley2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377UrbanCurbGutterValley3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392UrbanReplaceSidewalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397UrbanSidewalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Contents | vii
Subassembly Reference
In this chapterThese topics describe the construction and behavior for each
subassembly included in the Autodesk Civil 3D Corridor ■ Introduction to Subassemblies
■ BasicBarrierModeling catalogs. For more information on subassemblies,
■ BasicCurbsee Assemblies and Subassemblies in the Autodesk Civil 3D
Help.
■ BasicCurbAndGutter
■ BasicGuardrail
■ BasicLane
■ BasicLaneTransition
■ BasicShoulder
■ BasicSideSlopeCutDitch
■ BasicSideWalk
■ BridgeBoxGirder1
■ BridgeBoxGirder2
■ Channel
■ ChannelParabolicBottom
■ DaylightBasin
■ DaylightBench
■ DaylightGeneral
■ DaylightMaxOffset
■ DaylightMaxWidth
■ DaylightMinOffset
■ DaylightMinWidth
1
1
■ DaylightMultiIntercept
■ DaylightStandard
■ DaylightToOffset
■ DaylightToROW
■ GenericPavementStructure
■ LaneBrokenBack
■ LaneFromTaperedMedian1
■ LaneFromTaperedMedian2
■ LaneInsideSuper
■ LaneOutsideSuper
■ LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening
■ LaneParabolic
■ LaneTowardCrown
2 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Introduction to SubassembliesAutodesk Civil 3D subassemblies are preconfigured AutoCAD drawing objectsthat let you design three-dimensional sections of roadways and othercorridor-type structures.
These Help topics describe the construction and behavior of the subassembliesincluded in the Autodesk Civil 3D Corridor Modeling catalogs. Refer to theAssemblies and Subassemblies section of the Autodesk Civil 3D Help for moreinformation on using subassemblies for corridor design.
BasicBarrierCreates a two-sided New Jersey barrier on a roadway surface.
This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the center of the bottom of the barrier.
Introduction to Subassemblies | 3
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.15 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the top of the barrierTop Width0.5 ft
0.225 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the middle of the barrierMiddle Width0.75 ft
0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the bottom of the barrierBottom Width2.0 ft
0.9 mNumeric, positiveHeight to the top of the barrierTop Height3.0 ft
0.45 mNumeric, positiveHeight to the middle of the barrierMiddle Height1.5 ft
0.075 mNumeric, positiveHeight of the barrier curbCurb Height0.25 ft
0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth at the top of the barrier curbCurb Width1.9 ft
Output Parameters
None.
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Behavior
The subassembly constructs the shape of a two-sided New Jersey barrier, withthe base centered about the attachment point.
4 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the barrier shape as specified by theinput parameters.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
P1, P2, ... P8P1 - P8
BarrierAll links
BarrierS1
Coding Diagram
BasicCurbCreates a a simple curb at the edge of roadway. It can be attached to eitheroutside edge of pavement or to the edge of a median on the inside.
This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
BasicCurb | 5
Attachment
The attachment point is on the front face of the curb for case 1, and on theback face of the curb for case 2.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly
Side
0.225 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width of curbWidth0.75 ft
0.45 mNumeric, posi-tive
Depth of the curbDepth1.5 ft
Front FaceBooleanSpecifies the attachment point of thecurb as either Front Face or Back Face
Attachment Point
0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive
Depth of the curb below inside attach-ment point
Depth Below1.0 ft
0.0 mNumeric, posi-tive
Exposed height of the back face of curbBack Height0.0 ft
6 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The subassembly builds a rectangular shape for a simple curb, with theattachment point at the bottom inside edge of curb.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the curb shape as specified by theinput parameters.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Inside bottom of curbBottomCurbP1
Inside top of curbTopCurbP2
Outside top of curbBackCurbP3
CurbAll links
CurbS1
BasicCurb | 7
Coding Diagram
BasicCurbAndGutterCreates a a simple curb and gutter structure at the inside or outside edges ofroadway.
This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or back of the curb.
8 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly
Side
GutterEdge
BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb andgutter as either Gutter Edge or Back ofCurb
Insertion Point
0.45 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width from the flange of the gutter tothe flowline
Gutter Width1.5 ft
-6%Numeric% slope of the gutterGutter %Slope
0.225 mNumeric, posi-tive
Height from the flowline to the top ofcurb
Curb Height0.75 ft
0.15 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width of the top of curbCurb Width0.5 ft
0.45 mNumeric, posi-tive
Depth from the top of curb to the bot-tom of curb at the back-of-curb point
Curb Depth1.5 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) back of
BasicCurbAndGutter | 9
the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the curb and gutter shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Flange of gutterFlangeP1
Flowline of the gutterFlowline_GutterP2
Top of curbTopCurbP3
Back of curbBackCurbP4
Curb links on finish gradeTop, CurbL1, L2, L3
DatumL4
CurbS1
Coding Diagram
10 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
BasicGuardrailCreates a simple guardrail shape on the assembly.
This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the post at finish grade level.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly
Side
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
BasicGuardrail | 11
Behavior
The subassembly builds two rectangular shapes for the post and railing. Thedimensions are fixed, and cannot be changed by the user. The post extendsdownward from the attachment point for a fixed distance below finish grade.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the post and rail with the fixeddimensions.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
The code “Guardrail” is assigned to all points. No link or shape codes areassigned.
BasicLaneCreates a simple lane.
This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on finish grade.
12 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly
Side
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the laneWidth12.0 ft
0.2 mNumeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth0.67 ft
-2%Numeric% Slope of the lane%Slope
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Left / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
Numeric, positiveWidth of the laneWidth
Numeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth
Numeric% Slope of the lane%Slope
Behavior
The subassembly builds a finish grade and subbase surface, closed by verticallinks at either end. The lane is inserted outward from the attachment pointfor the given width, depth, and slope.
BasicLane | 13
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Crown of road on finish gradeCrownP1
Edge-of-traveled-way on finish gradeETWP2
Crown of road on subbaseCrown_SubbaseP3
Edge-of-traveled-way on subbaseETW_SubbaseP4
Paved finish gradeTop, PaveL1
SubbaseDatum, SubbaseL3
Pave1S1
Coding Diagram
BasicLaneTransitionCreates a simple lane with finish grade and subbase, where theedge-of-traveled-way can be tied to an alignment or profile.
This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
14 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on finish grade.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly
Side
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of laneWidth12.0 ft
0.2 mNumeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth0.67 ft
-2%Numeric% Slope of the lane%Slope
Hold offsetand eleva-tion
MenuDescribes how the subassembly be-haves when an alignment, profile, orboth are used as runtime logical as-
Transition
signments. Choices are provided ina list including:Hold offset and elevationHold elevation, change offsetHold grade, change offsetHold offset, change elevation
BasicLaneTransition | 15
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Change offset and elevation
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Widthvalue and tie the edge-of-traveled-wayto an offset alignment.
AlignmentEdge Offset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed slopeand tie the edge-of-traveled-way to anoffset profile.
ProfileEdge Elevation
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly provides a simple travel lane that can tie to an alignmentfor variable width, and a profile for variable slope. The behavior depends onthe Transition type selected:
DescriptionTransition Type
The width and slope of the lane is held to the Width and %Slope input parameter values.
Hold offset and elevation
The elevation of the edge-of-traveled-way is calculated fromthe Width and % slope input parameter values. The width isthen tied to the offset alignment.
Hold elevation, change offset
The width is adjusted to tie to the offset alignment. The %Slope input value is held for the adjusted width.
Hold grade, change offset
16 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionTransition Type
The width is held to the Width input parameter value. Theelevation of the edge-of-traveled-way is tied to the offsetprofile.
Hold offset, change elevation
The width is tied to the offset alignment, and the slope isadjusted to tie the elevation of the edge-of-traveled-way tothe offset profile.
Change offset and elevation
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Crown of road on finish gradeCrownP1
Edge-of-traveled-way on finish gradeETWP2
Crown of road on subbaseCrown_SubbaseP3
Edge-of-traveled-way on subbaseETW_SubbaseP4
Paved finish gradeTop,L1Pave
SubbaseDatum,L3Subbase
Pave1S1
BasicLaneTransition | 17
Coding Diagram
BasicShoulderCreates a simple paved shoulder with finish grade and subbase.
This subassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used forsimple roadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the shoulder on the finish grade.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly
Side
0.9 mNumeric, positiveWidth of shoulderWidth3 ft
18 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.2 mNumeric, positiveDepth from finish grade to subbaseDepth0.67 ft
-4%Numeric% Slope of the shoulder%Slope
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The shoulder links are inserted outwards from the attachment point at thegiven width, slope, and depth.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the lane using the input parameters.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Edge of paved shoulder on finishgrade
EPSP2
Edge of paved shoulder on subbaseEPS_SubP4
Paved finish gradeTop,L1Pave
SubbaseDatum, SubbaseL3
Pave1S1
BasicShoulder | 19
Coding Diagram
BasicSideSlopeCutDitchUsed to close from the edge of roadway to a daylight point in both cut andfill conditions.
The cut condition includes an optional ditch. The final daylighting link canbe omitted for cases where the corridor model needs to be left in an incompletestate. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces on adjacentproperties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway. Thissubassembly is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simpleroadway modeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
20 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the ditch foreslope for cut, andat the inside edge of the daylight link for fill.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly
Side
IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits the Daylightlink.
Daylight Link
BasicSideSlopeCutDitch | 21
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the daylight link forcut
Cut Slope
4 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the daylight link for fillFill Slope
4 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the ditch foreslope link(cut only)
Foreslope Slope
1.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the ditch foreslopelink (cut only)
Foreslope Width4.0 ft
0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the bottom of ditchBottom Width2.0 ft
4 : 1Numeric, positiveSlope of the ditch backslopelink (cut only)
Backslope Slope
1.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the ditch backslopelink (cut only)
Backslope Width4.0 ft
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional ma-terial lining along daylight
Place Lined Material
links. You can choose All Links,Daylight Links, Fill Links Only,and None.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 1 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the mate-rial applies for lining alonggarding links
Material 1 Name
22 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the mate-rial applies for lining alonggarding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 3 Thickness
Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the mate-rial applies for lining alonggarding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the surface for daylightingSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The attachment point is tested to determine if it is in cut or fill. If it is in fill,the fill daylight link is extended to the Daylight Surface at the given Fill Slope.If in cut, the foreslope, ditch bottom, and backslope are added, and the cut
BasicSideSlopeCutDitch | 23
daylight link is extended from the end of the backslope to the Daylight Surfaceat the given Cut Slope.
This subassembly optionally lets you add a lined material. You can specifythree ranges of slopes. Material type 1 is applied if the slope of the links is upto the specified slope value. From slope 1 to slope 2, the second type of materialapplied. Similarly, if the slopes of links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values,then material 3 is applied. If the link slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, thenno material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws a generic cut and fill slope with arrowsat the ends.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Fill condition only - hinge point for fill daylightlink
HingeHinge_Fill
P1
Cut condition only - inside edge of ditchDitch_InP2Fill condition only - daylight pointDaylight
Daylight_Fill
Cut condition only - outside edge of ditchDitch_OutP3
Cut condition only - hinge point for cut daylightlink
Hinge_CutP4
Cut condition only - daylight pointDaylightP5Daylight_Cut
Unpaved finish gradeTopL1 - L4Datum
24 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Daylight link in fillTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
Daylight link in cutTopL4DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Coding Diagram
BasicSideWalkUsed to insert links defining a concrete sidewalk with optional boulevards.
BasicSideWalk | 25
This is one of a group of Getting Started subassemblies used for simple roadwaymodeling, and for tutorial and training purposes.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the inside buffer.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicateswhich side the subassemblyis inserted toward
Side
1.8 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the concrete sidewalkWidth6.0 ft
0.1 mNumeric, positiveDepth of the concrete sidewalkDepth0.333 ft
0 ft, mNumeric, positiveWidth of the inside buffer zoneBuffer Width 1
0 ft, mNumeric, positiveWidth of the outside buffer zoneBuffer Width 2
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
26 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The links for the inside buffer zone, sidewalk, and outside buffer zone areinserted outward from the attachment point at a horizontal slope. The bufferzones may be omitted by setting their widths to zero.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the buffer zone and sidewalk asspecified by the input parameters.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Inside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_InP2
Outside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_OutP3
TopL1Datum
Sidewalk structure top linksTopL2Sidewalk
TopL3Datum
SidewalkL4 - L6Datum
Sidewalk concrete areaSidewalkS1
BasicSideWalk | 27
Coding Diagram
BridgeBoxGirder1Creates a simple box girder bridge shape with optional half-barriers.
This subassembly is designed to be used for visualization, not for structuraldesign.
28 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Attachment
The attachment point is at the centerline on the bridge deck finish grade. Thebridge section is built to the left and right sides.
BridgeBoxGirder1 | 29
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
5.34 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the left side of the bridgedeck
Left Width17.8 ft
5.34 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the right side of thebridge deck
Right Width17.8 ft
LONumeric or string% slope of the left deck surface.The slope can be a numeric value,
Left %Slope
or can use the following codes tomatch pre-defined superelevationspecifications of the baselinealignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (left)LO: outside lane slope (left)
LONumeric or string% slope of the right deck surface.The slope can be a numeric value,
Right %Slope
or can use the following codes tomatch pre-defined superelevationspecifications of the baselinealignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (right)LO: outside lane slope (right)
2.0 mNumeric, positiveVertical distance from the edge ofbridge deck to the soffit
Soffit Depth6.67 ft
0.150 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the bridge deck atthe edge
Edge Depth0.5 ft
30 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.300 mNumeric, positiveVertical distance from the edge ofbridge deck to the root of theflange
Flange Depth1.0 ft
1.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the overhangOverhang Width4.0 ft
2.0 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the girderGirder Width6.67 ft
IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits barriers to eachside of the bridge deck.
Include BarriersOmit Barriers
810 mmNumeric, positiveHeight of the barrier at the centerof median
Barrier A (mm or inches)32 in
131 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier B (mm or inches)4.5 in
59 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier C (mm or inches)2 in
125 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier D (mm or inches)5 in
557 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier E (mm or inches)22 in
178 mmNumeric, positiveAs shown in diagramBarrier F (mm or inches)7 in
BridgeBoxGirder1 | 31
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedLeft Width value and tie the leftedge-of-deck to an offset alignment.
AlignmentLeft Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedRight Width value and tie the rightedge-of-deck to an offset alignment.
AlignmentRight Width
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The subassembly builds the links for the bridge deck and under-structure basedon the input parameter values given. In superelevation, not all of the structureis rotated. The Soffit Depth is held to thegiven value from the top-edge-of-deckon the low side of the bridge, and the height of the girder is adjusted on thehigh side to the root of the deck.
If Include Barriers is True, New Jersey barrier sections are added at the left andright edges-of-deck. The slopes of the barrier bottoms adjust to match the deckslopes.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the bridge structure and barriers asspecified by the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Edge of bridge deckEBDP1, P3
Crown point on bridge deckCrown_DeckP2
32 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodesPoint, Link, or Shape
Deck, TopL1, L2
Bridge substructure linksBridgeL3 – L9
BarrierAll barrier links
BridgeS1
BarrierS2, S3
Coding Diagram
BridgeBoxGirder2Creates a two-chamber box girder bridge shape with optional half-barriers.
This subassembly is designed to be used for visualization, not for structuraldesign.
BridgeBoxGirder2 | 33
Attachment
The attachment point is at the dividing line between the left and right lanes,on the bridge deck finish grade. The bridge section is built to the left and rightsides.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
5.34 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width of the left lanes of thebridge deck
Left Lane Width17.8 ft
34 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
5.34 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width of the right lanes of thebridge deck
Right Lane Width17.8 ft
LONumeric orstring
% slope of the bridge deck fromthe left edge to the right edge. The
Deck %Slope
slope is constant across the entirewidth of the deck.Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (left)LO: outside lane slope (left)
IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits barriers to eachside of the bridge deck.
Include BarriersOmit Barriers
0.200 mNumeric, posi-tive
Deck thickness at the edgeDimension A0.667 ft
0.300 mNumeric, posi-tive
Deck thickness at the flangeDimension B1.0 ft
1.8 mNumeric, posi-tive
Total depth from finish grade tobottom of soffit
Dimension C6.0 ft
0.150 mNumeric, posi-tive
Step widthDimension D0.5 ft
1.425 mNumeric, posi-tive
Total flange widthDimension E4.75 ft
0.170 mNumeric, posi-tive
Bottom girder thicknessDimension F0.5625 ft
0.250 mNumeric, posi-tive
Center girder thicknessDimension G0.833 ft
0.210 mNumeric, posi-tive
Top girder thicknessDimension H0.7 ft
BridgeBoxGirder2 | 35
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.300 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width of the top corner of the in-side girder
Dimension I1.0 ft
0.600 mNumeric, posi-tive
Step heightDimension J2.0 ft
810 mmNumeric, posi-tive
Height of the barrier at the centerof median
Barrier A (mm or inches)32 in
131 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramBarrier B (mm or inches)4.5 in
59 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramBarrier C (mm or inches)2 in
125 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramBarrier D (mm or inches)5 in
557 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramBarrier E (mm or inches)22 in
178 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramBarrier F (mm or inches)7 in
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed LeftWidth and tie the left edge-of-deck to anoffset alignment.
AlignmentLeft Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightWidth and tie the right edge-of-deck to
AlignmentRight Width
an offset alignment at each station alongthe corridor.
36 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The subassembly builds the links for the bridge deck and under-structure basedon the input parameter values given. If the LI or LO options are used for thebridge deck, the superelevation slope for the left side is held constant acrossthe entire width of the bridge.
If Include Barriers is True, one-sided New Jersey barrier sections are added atthe left and right edges-of-deck. The slopes of the barrier bottoms adjust tomatch the deck slopes.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the bridge structure and barriers asspecified by the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Edge of bridge deckEBDP1, P3
Crown point on bridge deckCrown_DeckP2
Deck, TopL1
All exterior bridge substructure linksBridge
All interior bridge substructure linksGirder
BarrierAll barrier links
BridgeS1
BarrierS2, S3
BridgeBoxGirder2 | 37
Coding Diagram
ChannelThis subassembly creates an open channel with optional lining and backslopelinks.
38 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Attachment
The attachment point is located above the midpoint of the bottom width, ata height equal to the Depth parameter.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2.0 mNumeric, PositiveThe vertical offset down from the profilegrade line elevation to the bottom of thechannel.
Depth6.0 ft
2.0 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of bottom of the channel.Bottom Width6.0 ft
1 (:1)NumericChannel sideslopesSideslope
0.1mNumeric, PositiveDepth of channel liningLining Depth0.33ft
StringOptional marked point on the outermostchannel point on the left side; If no code
Left Marked Point
is entered then marked point is not insert-ed.
StringOptional marked point on the outermostchannel point on he right side; If no code
Right MarkedPoint
is entered then marked point is not insert-ed.
0.5mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel left side over the inser-tion point
Left ExtensionHeight 1.67ft
1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on left sideLeft BackslopeWidth 5.0 ft
Channel | 39
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on left sideLeft Backslope
0.5 mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel right side over theinsertion point
Right ExtensionHeight 1.67 ft
1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on he right sideRight BackslopeWidth 5.0 ft
4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on right sideRight Backslope
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ex-tension height on left side and tie to aprofile.
ProfileLeft Extension Height
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed LeftBackslope Width and tie to an offsetalignment.
AlignmentLeft Backslope Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed LeftBackslope and tie to a profile.
ProfileLeft Backslope Eleva-tion
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ex-tension height on right side and tie toa profile.
ProfileRight ExtensionHeight
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightBackslope Width and tie to an offsetalignment.
AlignmentLeft Backslope Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightBackslope and tie to a profile.
ProfileLeft Backslope Eleva-tion
40 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly builds an open channel shape using the input parameters.The attachment point is typically at the start of the baseline, at associatedalignments and profiles. The bottom link of the channel is then drawn usinga specified width. Using the sideslope parameter, the channel sides are drawnon either sides.
For the channel lining depth, if a non-zero positive value is specified, then amaterial lining is drawn around the channel, with horizontal (or vertical atthe bottom) offset of the lining equal to that parameter. If a zero value isspecified for the lining, then no links are inserted.
Similarly, if a zero value is specified for left or right extensions and backslopewidths, those links are omitted, or are not drawn. Extension height can becontrolled with a runtime logical assignment profile association. Similarly,the height of the backslope end point can be specified to a profile. To forcethe outer backslope point to the channel top elevation, associate this pointto the channel’s finish grade profile, to which this assembly is attached.
If the Backslope Width is omitted, the Right Marked Point is located on theouter point of channel height extension. If the Channel Height Extensionlink is also omitted, then the marked point is located on the outermost pointon the channel top.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Middle point of the channel bottomChannel_FlowlineP1
Channel_BottomP2,P3
Channel_TopP4, P5
Channel | 41
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Channel_ExtensionP6,P7
Channel_BackslopeP8,P9
P13
Datum, Channel_Bottom and Top (iflining is NOT used)
L1, L2, L3
Datum, TopL4 to L7
Channel_Bottom and TOP (if lining ISused)
L8 to L12
Channel Lining MaterialLining_MaterialS1
Coding Diagram
42 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
ChannelParabolicBottomThis subassembly creates an open channel with a parabolic bottom, withoptional lining and backslope links.
Attachment
The attachment point is located above the midpoint of the bottom width, ata height equal to the Depth parameter.
ChannelParabolicBottom | 43
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2.0 mNumeric, PositiveThe vertical offset down from theprofile grade line elevation to thebottom of the channel.
Depth6.0 ft
2.0 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of bottom of the channel.Bottom Width6.0 ft
7Integer, PositiveNumber of tesselation points onparabolic curve
Curve TesselationPoints
1 (:1)NumericChannel sideslopesSideslope
0.1 mNumeric, PositiveDepth of channel liningLining Depth0.33 ft
StringOptional marked point on the outer-most channel point on the left side;
Left Marked Point
If no code is entered then markedpoint is not inserted.
StringOptional marked point on the outer-most channel point on he right side;
Right Marked Point
If no code is entered then markedpoint is not inserted.
0.5 mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel left side overthe insertion point
Left Extension Height1.67 ft
1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on left sideLeft Backslope Width5.0 ft
4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on left sideLeft Backslope
44 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.5 mNumeric, PositiveExtension of channel right side overthe insertion point
Right Extension Height1.67 ft
1.5 mNumeric, PositiveChannel backfill width on he rightside
Right Backslope Width5.0 ft
4 (:1)NumericChannel backfill slope on right sideRight Backslope
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedextension height on left side andtie to a profile.
ProfileLeft Extension Height
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedLeft Backslope Width and tie to anoffset alignment.
Align-ment
Left Backslope Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedLeft Backslope and tie to a profile.
ProfileLeft Backslope Elevation
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedextension height on right side andtie to a profile.
ProfileRight Extension Height
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedRight Backslope Width and tie toan offset alignment.
Align-ment
Left Backslope Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedRight Backslope and tie to a profile.
ProfileLeft Backslope Elevation
Output Parameters
None.
ChannelParabolicBottom | 45
Behavior
This subassembly builds an open channel shape using the input parameters.The attachment point is typically at the start of the baseline, at associatedalignments and profiles. At the bottom left and right lower sideslope link,points are located using a specified Bottom Width parameter. A paraboliccurve is drawn between these two points with grade-in and grade-out equalto the specified sideslope parameter. The length of the parabolic curve is equalto the Bottom Width value. This parabolic curve is drawn in tessellated linksusing the Curve Tessellation Points parameter. If the tessellation index is odd,then a point is added directly below the attachment point of the subassembly.
For the channel lining depth, if a non-zero positive value is specified, then amaterial lining is drawn around the channel with a horizontal (or vertical atthe bottom) offset of the lining equal to that parameter. If a zero value isspecified for the lining, then no links are inserted.
Similarly, if a zero value is specified for left or right extensions and backslopewidths, those links are omitted or are not drawn. Extension height can becontrolled with a profile runtime logical assignment association. Similarly,the height of the outermost backslope point can be specified with a profileruntime logical assignment. To force the outermost backslope point to thechannel top height, associate this to the channel’s finish grade profile, ttowhich this assembly is attached.
If the Backslope Width is omitted, then the marked point is located on theouter point of the channel height extension. If the Channel Height Extentionlink is also omitted, then the marked point is located on the outermost pointof the channel top.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Middle point of the channel bottomChannel_FlowlineP1
Channel_BottomP2,P3
46 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Channel_TopP4, P5
Channel_ExtensionP6,P7
Channel_BackslopeP8,P9
P13
Datum, Channel_Bottom andTop (if lining is NOT used)
L1, L2, L3
Datum, TopL4 to L7
Channel_Bottom and TOP (iflining IS used)
L8 to L12
Channel Lining MaterialLining_MaterialS1
Coding Diagram
ChannelParabolicBottom | 47
DaylightBasinInserts links to create a basin and cut daylight slope for a cut condition, or abasin, berm, and fill slope for a fill condition.
The final daylighting link can be omitted in cases where the corridor modelneeds to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done sothat grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on theuncompleted roadway.
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
48 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the basin foreslope. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly
Side
IncludeInclude / OmitIncludes or omits the Daylight link.Daylight Link
OmitInclude / OmitIncludes or omits the Daylight link.Include Daylight LinkOmit Daylight Link
DaylightBasin | 49
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
3 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for the basin foreslope linkForeSlope Slope
1.2 mNumeric, positiveThe width of the foreslopeForeSlope Width4.0 ft
0.0Numeric, positiveThe depth of the bottom of thebasin from the bottom of the fores-lope link
Basin Depth
1.8 mNumeric, positiveThe slope of the sides of the basinBasin Slope6.0 ft
1.8 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the basinBasin Width6.0 ft
1.8 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the berm used in fill condi-tions
Berm Width6.0 ft
3 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope of the daylight link in cutconditions
Cut Slope
3 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope of the daylight link in fillconditions
Fill Slope
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materiallining along daylight links. You can
Place Lined Material
choose All Links, Daylight Links, FillLinks Only, and None.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial
Material 1 Thickness
50 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial
Material 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial
Material 3 Thickness
SeededGrass
StringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedBasin Depth and tie the elevation ofthe basin to a profile.
ProfileBasin Elevation
RequiredName of the daylighting surface.SurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
None.
DaylightBasin | 51
Behavior
The subassembly builds the links for the basin foreslope and basin out to thebasin test point. If a profile is given, the width of the foreslope varies to holdto the basin profile, while the basin depth is held constant. If the basin testpoint is in cut, the daylight intercept is calculated on the target surface at thegiven Cut Slope. If it is in fill, a top-of-berm link is added, and the daylightintercept is calculated on the target surface at the given Fill Slope. The daylightlink is not inserted if Omit Daylight Link is set to True. If the top-of-berm linkintersects the target surface, the section is terminated at the intersection.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the foreslope, basin sideslopes, andbasin bottom with the given input parameter values. Both the cut and fillcondition links are shown in dashed lines, with the daylight links extendedoutward for a width of 3 meters or 10 feet at the given slopes. The daylightlinks terminate in arrowheads pointing outwards.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Inside bottom of basinDitch_InP3
Outside bottom of basinDitch_OutP4
Hinge point for the cut conditionHingeP5Hinge_Cut
Hinge point for the fill conditionHingeP6
52 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge_Fill
Daylight point, and daylight point foreither the cut or fill condition
DaylightDaylight_Cut or
P7
Daylight_Fill
TopAll linksDatum
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL6DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL6DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
Coding Diagram
DaylightBasin | 53
DaylightBenchInserts links to create cut or fill catch slopes with repeating benches as needed.
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the initial cut or fill slope. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.
54 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly
Side
2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for the cut daylight slopeCut Slope
3.0 mNumericThe maximum allowable height forthe cut daylight link without bench-ing
Max Cut Height10.0 ft
2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for the fill daylight slopeFill Slope
3.0 mNumeric, positiveThe maximum allowable height forthe fill daylight link without benching
Max Fill Height10.0 ft
1.5 mNumeric, positiveThe width of the benchBench Width5.0 ft
2 (%)NumericThe +/- % slope of the bench. Positiveslopes are upward in the direction ofincreasing offset
Bench % Slope
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materiallining along daylight links. You can
Place Lined Material
choose All Links, Daylight Links, FillLinks Only, and None.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial
Material 1 Thickness
DaylightBench | 55
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial
Material 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined mate-rial
Material 3 Thickness
SeededGrass
StringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
56 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Behavior
The initial hinge point is set at the attachment point. The hinge point elevationis checked against the target surface to determine if the section is in the cutor fill condition. An intercept is calculated to the target surface using the givenCut Slope or Fill Slope. If the height to the intercept exceeds the Max Height,the link with the Max Height is inserted, and the bench link is added. Thehinge point is reset to the outside edge of the bench and the process is repeateduntil a daylight link is found that does not exceed the Max Height.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws the initial cut and fill slopes to theirmaximum heights, a single bench, followed by cut and fill daylight slopes forhalf the maximum heights. The daylight links terminate with an arrowheadpointing outwards.
DaylightBench | 57
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condition. Thisonly applies to the inside edge of the actual day-lighting link.
HingeHinge_Cut orHinge_Fill
P1
Daylight point, and daylight point for either thecut or fill condition. This only applies to the actualdaylight point.
DaylightDaylight_Cut orDaylight_Fill
P2
The inside edge of the bench(es)Bench_InP2
The outside edge of the bench(es)Bench_OutP3
TopAll linksDatum
Daylight link for cut sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
58 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Coding Diagram
DaylightGeneralThis subassembly is a generalized solution to closing the sections from theoutside edge of roadway to cut or fill intercept point.
It provides a variety of solutions for cut and fill conditions, as described below.Based on the input parameters provided, it first attempts to build a cut section.If unable to do this it builds a fill section instead. The final daylighting linkcan be omitted for cases where the corridor model needs to be left in anincomplete state. For example, this might be done so that grading surfaces onadjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on the uncompleted roadway.
DaylightGeneral | 59
60 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The DaylightGeneral subassembly is typically attached to the subassemblyused at the outside edge of the roadway, such as the edge of shoulder, backof sidewalk, or back of curb. The attachment point is at the inside edge of thefirst Cut link, first Fill link, or Guardrail widening link.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly
Side
DaylightGeneral | 61
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
FalseTrue / FalseIncludes or omits the Daylightlink.
Omit Daylight Link
3Numeric, positive, inte-ger
Number of the Cut Link whoseoutside end is the test point
Cut Test Point
for determining if the sectionis in cut or fill
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 1Cut 1 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 1Cut 1 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 2Cut 2 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 2Cut 2 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 3Cut 3 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 3Cut 3 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 4Cut 4 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 4Cut 4 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 5Cut 5 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 5Cut 5 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 6Cut 6 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 6Cut 6 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 7Cut 7 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 7Cut 7 Slope
62 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Cut 8Cut 8 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Cut 8Cut 8 Slope
6 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFirst, flattest, catch slope toattempt.
Flat Cut Slope
1.5 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using the FlatCut Slope
Flat Cut Max Height5 ft
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveCut slope to attempt if the FlatCut Slope link exceeds the FlatCut Max Height
Medium Cut Slope
3 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using theMedium Cut Slope.
Medium Cut Max Height10 ft
2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveCut slope to use if the MediumCut Slope link exceeds theMedium Cut Max Height.
Steep Cut Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Fill 1Fill 1 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Fill 1Fill 1 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Fill 2Fill 2 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Fill 2Fill 2 Slope
0.0Numeric, positiveWidth of link Fill 3Fill 3 Width
0.0NumericSlope (x : 1) of link Fill 3Fill 3 Slope
DaylightGeneral | 63
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
6 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFirst, flattest, catch slope toattempt. (x : 1)
Flat Fill Slope
1.5 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using the FlatFill Slope
Flat Fill Max Height5 ft
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFill slope to attempt if the FlatFill Slope link exceeds the FlatFill Max Height
Medium Fill Slope
3 mNumeric, positiveMaximum allowable height ofthe closing link using theMedium Fill Slope
Medium Fill Max Height10 ft
2 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveFill slope to use if the MediumFill Slope link exceeds theMedium Fill Max Height
Steep Fill Slope
0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the guardrail widen-ing link for fill slopes using
Guardrail Width2 ft
Steep Fill Slope. Use zero forno guardrail widening.
-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the guardrailwidening link
Guardrail %Slope
OmitInclude / OmitInclude to insert links for theguardrail structure on the
Include GuardrailOmit Guardrail
guardrail widening segment.Omit does not insert theguardrail structure.
0.3 mNumericWhen the guardrail is included,the width from the attachment
Width to Post1 ft
point to the inside edge of theguardrail post.
64 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional ma-terial lining along daylight
Place Lined Material
links. You can choose All Links,Daylight Links, Fill Links Only,and None.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 1 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the ma-terial applies for lining alonggarding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the ma-terial applies for lining alonggarding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated materiallining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 3 Thickness
DaylightGeneral | 65
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the ma-terial applies for lining alonggarding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
This subassembly is designed to accommodate a wide variety of clear zone,cut section, and fill section configurations. It allows up to eight links to beused in cut sections from the edge-of-roadway to the cut intercept hinge point,and any one of these links can be used as the cut test point. Up to three filllinks can be used out to the fill hinge point, and provides special guardrailshoulder widening for steep fill conditions.
Cut links are denoted as Cut 1, Cut 2, up to Cut 8. The Cut Test Point inputvalue indicates which cut link ends at the cut test point. The logical steps usedare as follows:
1 The cut surface links are constructed temporarily from Cut 1 to the cutlink ending at the test point.
2 If the test point, or any portion of the temporary surface, is below thetarget surface, the section is completed as a cut section. If the entire setof temporary links is above the target surface the section is completed asa fill section.
66 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
The cut example in the subassembly diagram show where five Cut links aredefined. The cut test point is on the third link. The fill example shows twodefined Fill links.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Cut Section:
1 If the cut test point is above the target surface, the links are tracedbackwards from the test point until an intersection with the target surfaceis found. The section is terminated at this point.
2 If the test point is below the target surface, the remaining cut links areadded one by one. Each one is tested to see if it intersects the daylightsurface. If so, the cut section terminates at the intersection point and theappropriate Hinge and Daylight codes are assigned.
3 To close to the target surface in cut:
■ If Include Daylight Link is set to False, no cut daylight intercept iscalculated.
■ The intercept to the daylight surface is calculated using the Flat CutSlope value.
■ If the height of the flat cut slope exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height,the intercept to the daylight surface is re-calculated using the MediumCut Slope value.
■ If the height of the medium cut slope exceeds the Medium Cut MaxHeight, the intercept to the daylight surface is re-calculated using theSteep Cut Slope value.
DaylightGeneral | 67
Fill Section
1 Fill links are inserted outward from the attachment point to the fill hingepoint, which is the outer edge of the last non-zero fill link.
2 When a fill link intersects the daylight surface before reaching the hingepoint, the section is terminated at the intersection and the appropriateHinge and Daylight point codes are assigned.
3 To close to the target surface in fill:
■ The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat Fill Slopevalue. If the height of the intercept link does not exceed the Flat FillMax Height, this slope is used to add the link to the assembly,otherwise:
■ The intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the MediumFill Slope value. If the height of the intercept link does not exceed theMedium Fill Max Height, this slope is used to add the link to theassembly, otherwise:
■ If a non-zero guardrail width is given, the links (Fill 1, Fill 2 etc.) areremoved. The guardrail widening link is added at the attachmentpoint using the Guardrail Width and Guardrail %Slope parameters.The intercept to the target surface is re-calculated from the outsideedge of the guardrail widening link using the Steep Fill Slope value,and the link is added to the assembly.
■ If the guardrail width is zero, the steep fill slope is applied from thefill hinge point.
A guardrail structure may be applied to fill sections that meet the criteria forusing the steep fill slope. If this criteria is met, the Guardrail Width is not zero,and Include Guardrail is set to true, then a guardrail structure is drawn at thestation. The dimensions of the guardrail structure are fixed as shown in thediagram below.
68 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly shows both the cut and fill conditionflat-slope solutions in dashed lines. The daylight link is extended outward fora horizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet, and terminates with an arrowhead.
DaylightGeneral | 69
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Ditch test point at the end of Cut Link n,where n is the cut test point link number
Ditch_OutCP(n+1)
Hinge point for the cut intercept slopeHingeCP (1 to n)Hinge_Cut
Cut slopestake pointDaylightCP10Daylight_Cut
Hinge point for the fill intercept slopeHingeFP (1 to n)Hinge_Fill
Fill slopestake pointDaylightFP5Daylight_Fill
All cut, fill, and guardrail linksTopAll linksDatum
No codes are assigned to the points on theguardrail structure, if included.
NoneGuardrail points
All links comprising the guardrail structure,if included.
GuardrailGuardrail links
Daylight link for cut sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopFinal daylight linkDatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
70 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Coding Diagram
DaylightGeneral | 71
DaylightMaxOffsetInserts a link that extends to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.
If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point within a maximum+/- offset from the baseline.
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.
72 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly
Side
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting incut conditions
Cut Slope
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting infill conditions
Fill Slope
3.0 mNumericThe maximum allowable offset forthe daylight point
Max Offset from Base-line 10.0 ft
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materiallining along daylight links. You can
Place Lined Material
choose All Links, Daylight Links, FillLinks Only, and None.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined ma-terial
Material 1 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 2
DaylightMaxOffset | 73
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined ma-terial
Material 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until whichthe associated material lining isplaced
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined ma-terial
Material 3 Thickness
Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along garding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to overridethe fixed Max Offset value
AlignmentMax Offset
and tie the maximum offsetto an offset alignment.
RequiredName of the daylightingsurface.
SurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight point.Daylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight point.Daylight Elevation
74 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, its offset is compared to the Max Offset value. Ifthe Max Offset value is exceeded, the daylight point is moved to the maximumoffset point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point is found, the processis repeated for the fill condition.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Max Offset duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Max Offset will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. The daylight linksare terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.
DaylightMaxOffset | 75
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point, and hinge point for the cutor fill condition
HingeHinge_Cut or
P1
Hinge_Fill
Daylight point, and daylight point for thecut or fill condition
DaylightDaylight_Cut or
P2
Daylight_Fill
TopL1Datum
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
76 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Coding Diagram
DaylightMaxWidthInserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.
If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point within a maximumwidth from the hinge point.
DaylightMaxWidth | 77
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly
Side
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in cutconditions
Cut Slope
78 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in fillconditions
Fill Slope
3.0 mNumericThe maximum allowable width fromthe hinge point (attachment point) forthe daylight point
Max Width10.0 ft
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material lin-ing along daylight links. You can choose
Place Lined Material
All Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only,and None.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thickness
Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links
Material 3 Name
DaylightMaxWidth | 79
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed MaxWidth value and tie the maximumwidth to an offset alignment
AlignmentMax Width
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, the width of the daylight link is compared to theMax Width value. If the Max Width value is exceeded, the daylight point ismoved to the maximum width point on the target surface. If no cut daylightpoint is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Max Width duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Max Width will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
80 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. The daylight linksare terminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point, and hinge point for the cut or fillcondition
HingeHinge_Cut or
P1
Hinge_Fill
Daylight point, and daylight point for the cutor fill condition
DaylightDaylight_Cut or
P2
Daylight_Fill
TopL1Datum
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
DaylightMaxWidth | 81
Coding Diagram
DaylightMinOffsetInserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.
If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point beyond aminimum offset from the baseline.
82 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly
Side
DaylightMinOffset | 83
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in cutconditions
Cut Slope
4 ( : 1)Numeric, positiveThe slope for normal daylighting in fillconditions
Fill Slope
3.0 mNumericThe minimum allowable offset for thedaylight point
Min Offset fromBaseline 10.0 ft
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All
Place Lined Materi-al
Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, andNone.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thick-ness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thick-ness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, positiveSpecifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thick-ness
84 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the material ap-plies for lining along garding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Min Offsetand tie the minimum offset to an offset align-ment
AlignmentMin Offset
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, its offset is compared to the Min Offset value. Ifthe daylight point is within the Min Offset, the daylight point is moved tothe minimum offset point on the target surface. If no cut daylight point isfound, the process is repeated for the fill condition.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Min Offset duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Min Offset will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes of
DaylightMinOffset | 85
links fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for the Min Offset distance. The daylight links areterminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point, either for the cut or fill condi-tion
HingeHinge_Cut or
P1
Hinge_Fill
Daylight point, and daylight point for eitherthe cut or fill condition
DaylightDaylight_Cut or
P2
Daylight_Fill
TopL1Datum
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1
86 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
Coding Diagram
DaylightMinWidthInserts a link that daylights to a target surface at a user-defined cut or fill slope.
If necessary, the slope is adjusted to keep the daylight point beyond aminimum width from the hinge point.
DaylightMinWidth | 87
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
88 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
The slope for normal daylighting in cut con-ditions
Cut Slope
4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
The slope for normal daylighting in fill condi-tions
Fill Slope
3.0 mNumericThe minimum allowable offset for the day-light point
Min Width10.0 ft
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All Links,Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None.
Place Lined Materi-al
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the asso-ciated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thick-ness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies forlining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the asso-ciated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thick-ness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies forlining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the asso-ciated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thick-ness
DaylightMinWidth | 89
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the material applies forlining along garding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Min Width andtie the minimum width to an offset alignment
AlignmentMin Width
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
This subassembly attempts to calculate a daylight point for the cut condition.If a daylight point is found, the width of the daylight link is compared to theMin Width value. If the daylight point is within the Min Width, the daylightpoint is moved to the minimum width point on the target surface. If no cutdaylight point is found, the process is repeated for the fill condition.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Min Width duringcorridor modeling, the value of the Min Width will vary to match the offsetof the alignment.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
90 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill slopes in dashedlines extended outward for the Min Width distance. The daylight links areterminated with arrowheads pointing outwards.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point, either for the cut or fill conditionHingeP1Hinge_Cut orHinge_Fill
Daylight point, and daylight point for eitherthe cut or fill condition
DaylightDaylight_Cut or
P2
Daylight_Fill
TopL1Datum
DaylightMinWidth | 91
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
Coding Diagram
DaylightMultiInterceptThis subassembly is used when a cut or fill daylight slope may have more thanone intersection with the target surface.
An input parameter controls which intercept is used.
92 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the hinge point of the daylight link. Thiscomponent can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
The slope for normal daylighting in cut conditionsCut Slope
4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
The slope for normal daylighting in fill conditionsFill Slope
DaylightMultiIntercept | 93
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
10Numeric, posi-tive, integer
The number of the intercept to save. If the Inter-cept Number value is greater than the actual
Intercept Num-ber
number of intercepts, the highest intercept foundis used
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material lining alongdaylight links. You can choose All Links, DaylightLinks, Fill Links Only, and None.
Place Lined Ma-terial
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the associatedmaterial lining is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies for lin-ing along garding links
Material 1Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the associatedmaterial lining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material applies for lin-ing along garding links
Material 2Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the associatedmaterial lining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3Thickness
SeededGrass
StringSpecifies the name of the material applies for lin-ing along garding links
Material 3Name
94 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
This subassembly attempts to find all possible daylight points for the cut slopecondition. If one or more daylight points are found, they are ordered andnumbered by increasing offset from the hinge point. The daylight link isterminated at the point that matches the Intercept Number value. If theintercept number is higher than the number of intercepts found, the lastintercept is used.
If no daylight points are found for the cut condition, the process is repeatedfor the fill condition.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
DaylightMultiIntercept | 95
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays both the cut and fill solutions indashed lines extended outward for a distance of 3 meters or 10 feet. Thedaylight links terminate in arrowheads pointing outwards.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point, either for the cut or fill conditionHingeP1Hinge_Cut orHinge_Fill
Daylight point, and daylight point for either thecut or fill condition
DaylightDaylight_Cut or
P2
Daylight_Fill
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
96 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Coding Diagram
DaylightStandardThis subassembly creates corridor-side daylighting links with user-definedslope configurations, such as flat, medium, and maximum slopes for cut andfill situations.
This subassembly creates either a v-shaped or flat- bottom ditch in cutsituations, and includes an option to include guard rail widening for steep fillconditions.
The final daylighting link can be omitted for cases where the corridor modelneeds to be left in an incomplete state. For example, this might be done sothat grading surfaces on adjacent properties can tie to the hinge point on theuncompleted roadway.
DaylightStandard | 97
98 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
This subassembly is typically attached to the subassembly used at the outsideedge of the roadway, such as the edge of shoulder, back of sidewalk, or backof curb. The attachment point is at the inside edge of the ditch front link, thetop of the flat or medium fill slope, or inside edge of guardrail widening link,depending on conditions.
DaylightStandard | 99
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly
Side
IncludeInclude / OmitInclude or omit the Daylight link.Include Daylight LinkOmit Daylight Link
6 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
First, flattest, catch slope to at-tempt. (x : 1)
Flat Cut Slope
1.5 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the Flat CutSlope
Flat Cut Max Height5 ft
4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
Cut slope to attempt if the FlatCut Slope link exceeds the FlatCut Max Height
Medium Cut Slope
3 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the MediumCut Slope
Medium Cut Max Height10 ft
2 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
Cut slope to use if the MediumCut Slope link exceeds the Medi-um Cut Max Height
Steep Cut Slope
3.6 mNumericFor cut sections, the width of thefront-of-ditch link
Foreslope Width12 ft
4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
Slope of the front-of-ditch link (x: 1). This link is always inserteddownwards.
Foreslope Slope
100 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
1 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width of the bottom of ditch. Usezero for a V-ditch.
Ditch Width3 ft
6 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
First, flattest, catch slope to at-tempt. (x : 1)
Flat Fill Slope
1.5 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the Flat FillSlope
Flat Fill Max Height5 ft
4 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
Fill slope to attempt if the Flat FillSlope link exceeds the Flat FillMax Height
Medium Fill Slope
3 mNumericMaximum allowable height of theclosing link using the Medium FillSlope
Medium Fill Max Height10 ft
2 ( : 1)Numeric, posi-tive
Fill slope to use if the Medium FillSlope link exceeds the MediumFill Max Height
Steep Fill Slope
0.6 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width of the guardrail wideninglink for fill slopes using Steep Fill
Guardrail Width2 ft
Slope. Use zero for no guardrailwidening.
-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the guardrail wideninglink
Guardrail %Slope
OmitInclude / OmitInclude to insert the guardrailstructure when guardrail widen-
Include GuardrailOmit Guardrail
ing occurs. Omit does not insertthe guardrail structure.
0.3 mNumericWhen the guardrail is included,the width from the attachment
Width to Post1 ft
DaylightStandard | 101
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
point to the inside edge of theguardrail post.
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional materi-al lining along daylight links. You
Place Lined Material
can choose All Links, DaylightLinks, Fill Links Only, and None.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated material lin-ing is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 1 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along gardinglinks
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated material lin-ing is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along gardinglinks
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit untilwhich the associated material lin-ing is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of linedmaterial
Material 3 Thickness
102 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Seeded GrassStringSpecifies the name of the materialapplies for lining along gardinglinks
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
The following steps are used by this subassembly to determine whichconditions apply:
1 The location of the Cut Test Point (see diagram) is calculated using theForeslope Width, Foreslope Slope, and Ditch Width parameters.
2 If any portion of the foreslope slope or ditch bottom is in cut, the sectionis computed as a cut section as follows:
■ If the Cut Test Point is above the target surface, the Foreslope link orditch bottom is truncated at the point where it intersects the surfacegoing from cut to fill, otherwise:
DaylightStandard | 103
■
■ If Include Daylight Link is set to omit, no daylight link is calculated.
■ The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat CutSlope value.
■ If the height of the flat cut slope exceeds the Flat Cut Max Height,the intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the MediumCut Slope value.
■ If the height of the medium cut slope exceeds the Medium Cut MaxHeight, the intercept to the target surface is re-calculated using theSteep Cut Slope value.
3 If no portion of the foreslope link or ditch bottom is below the targetsurface, the section is computed as a Fill section as follows:
■ The intercept to the target surface is calculated using the Flat Fill Slopevalue.
■ If the height of the flat fill slope exceeds the Flat Fill Max Height, theintercept to the target surface is re-calculated using the Medium FillSlope value.
■ If the height of the medium fill slope exceeds the Medium Fill MaxHeight, the guardrail widening link is added to the assembly usingthe Guardrail Width and Guardrail %Slope parameters (unless theGuardrail Width is zero). The intercept to the target surface isre-calculated from the putside edge of the guardrail widening linkusing the Steep Fill Slope value.
■ If Include Daylight Link is True, the flat, medium, or steep fill slopelink is added to the assembly.
A guardrail structure may be applied to fill sections that meet the criteria forusing the steep fill slope. If this criteria is met, the Guardrail Width is not zero,and Include Guardrail is set to true, then a guardrail structure is drawn at the
104 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
station. The dimensions of the guardrail structure are fixed as shown in thediagram below.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly shows both the cut and fill flat-slopeconditions. The daylight links are extended outward for a horizontal distanceof 3 meters or 10 feet, and are shown in dashed lines terminating in arrowheadspointing outwards.
DaylightStandard | 105
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point for the normal fill conditionHingeP1Hinge_Fill
Hinge point for the fill condition withguardrail widening
HingeHinge_Fill
P2
Inside edge of the bottom of the ditch (cutcondition only)
Ditch_InP2
Outside edge of the bottom of the ditch(cut condition only)
Ditch_OutHinge
P3
Hinge_Cut
Fill slopestake point (fill condition only)DaylightP3Daylight_Fill
Cut slopestake point (cut condition only)DaylightP4Daylight_Cut
All links added by this subassembly, exceptfor the guardrail structure links.
TopDatum
All Links
No codes are assigned to the points on theguardrail strucure, if included.
NoneGuardrail points
All links comprising the guardrail strucure,if included.
GuardrailGuardrail links
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL3
106 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopFill Daylight LinkDatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
Coding Diagram
DaylightStandard | 107
DaylightToOffsetInserts a daylight link from the attachment point to a given offset from thebaseline.
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the daylight link.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0Numeric+/- offset of the daylight point from thebaseline
Daylight Offset fromBaseline
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All
Place Lined Material
Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, andNone.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the as-sociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 1
12 inch-es
Numeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thickness
108 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the as-sociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which the as-sociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thickness
SeededGrass
StringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Day-light Offset and tie the daylight offset toan offset alignment
AlignmentDaylight Offset
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
DaylightToOffset | 109
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
A daylight ink is inserted from the attachment point to the surface at thegiven offset.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays a link extending outwards at a -4: 1 slope to the specified offset. The daylight link terminates with an arrowheadpointing outwards.
110 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point. Hinge_Cut is used if the daylight linkhas an upward slope; Hinge_Fill is used if the daylightlink has a downward slope.
HingeHinge_Cut orHinge_Fill
P1
Daylight pointDaylightP2Daylight_Cut orDaylight_Fill
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
Coding Diagram
DaylightToROWInserts a daylight link from the attachment point to a given offset from theright-of-way limit on a target surface.
DaylightToROW | 111
You can also specify optional lined materials for daylight and other links (AllLinks, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, and None).
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the daylight link.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0Numeric+/- offset of the right-of-way limit fromthe baseline
ROW Offset from Baseline
0.0Numeric+/- value added to the ROW Limit Offset.A negative adjustment value moves the
Offset Adjustment
daylight point inside of the ROW limit;a positive value moves it outside theROW limit.
NoneStringSpecifies to place optional material liningalong daylight links. You can choose All
Place Lined Material
Links, Daylight Links, Fill Links Only, andNone.
1 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 1
112 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
12 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 1 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links
Material 1 Name
2 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 2
6 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 2 Thickness
Rip RapStringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links
Material 2 Name
4 : 1SlopeSpecifies the slope limit until which theassociated material lining is placed
Slope Limit 3
4 inchesNumeric, posi-tive
Specifies the thickness of lined materialMaterial 3 Thickness
SeededGrass
StringSpecifies the name of the material appliesfor lining along garding links
Material 3 Name
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ROWOffset and tie the ROW offset to an off-set alignment
AlignmentROW Offset
RequiredName of the daylighting surfaceSurfaceDaylight Surface
DaylightToROW | 113
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericOffset of the daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
The daylight offset is calculated as the ROW Limit Offset plus or minus theOffset Adjustment. A daylight link is inserted from the attachment point tothe calculated offset on the target surface.
Like other daylight subassemblies, this subassembly optionally lets you adda lined material. You can specify three ranges of slopes. Material type 1 isapplied if the slope of the links is up to the specified slope value. From slope1 to slope 2, the second type of material applied. Similarly, if the slopes oflinks fall within slope 2 and slope 3 values, then material 3 is applied. If thelink slopes are flatter than slope limit 3, then no material is applied.
If a lined materail is added to the subassembly, then parallal links are addedto the daylight links with specified thickness. Bottom level links are codedwith Datum and daylight links are coded with Top. Shapes enclosed by thesematerials are coded with material name.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays a link extending outwards at a -4: 1 slope to the right-of-way offset, plus or minus the offset adjustment. Thedaylight link terminates with an arrowhead pointing outwards.
114 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Hinge point. Hinge_Cut is used if thedaylight link has an upward slope;
HingeHinge_Cut or
P1
Hinge_Fill is used if the daylight link hasa downward slope.
Hinge_Fill
Daylight pointDaylightP2Daylight_Cut orDaylight_Fill
Daylight link for cut sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Cut
Daylight link for fill sectionTopL1DatumDaylightDaylight_Fill
Coding Diagram
GenericPavementStructureThis subassembly creates a simple pavement structure with user-definablepoint, link, and shape codes.
GenericPavementStructure | 115
This subassembly can be used as a lane or shoulder using superelevationparameters for the slope. The width and outside edge elevation can becalculated based on an optional alignment and profile. This subassembly canbe stacked one below another to form multiple layers, or butted side by sideto form multiple lanes with or without grade breaks. If multipleGenericPavementStructure subassemblies are stacked, the bottom slope canbe used as the top slope of subsequent layers. Optionally, the bottom widthof the subsequent subassembly can be assigned as the width of the previoussubassembly.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the upper inside edge of the pavement structure.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassem-bly is inserted towards.
Side
3.6 m 12.0 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the subassembly.Width
0.2 m 0.67 ftNumeric, positiveSpecifies optional additional widthto add.
Shift Width
-2%NumericDefault slope of the top link, whensuperelevation slope for the align-ment is not specified.
Default CrossSlope
116 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoList of options (a) No, (b)Outside lane slope, (c) In-
Specifies to use slope from superel-evation specification defined on thebaseline alignment.
Use Supereleva-tion Slope
side lane slope, (d) Outsideshoulder slope, (e) Insideshoulder slope
0.2 m 0.67 ftNumeric, positiveDepth from top link to the bottomlink of the subassembly.
Depth
NoBoolean Yes/NoIndicates to deflect outside verticalface to a specified slope.
Deflect OuterVertical Face
1:1NumericSpecifies the slope of the outeredge if choose not to be vertical.
Outer Edge Slope
StringSpecifies point codes to the insidepoint on the top link.
Inside-Top PointCodes
StringSpecifies point codes to the outsidepoint on the top link.
Outside-TopPoint Codes
StringSpecifies point codes to the outsidepoint on the bottom link.
Outside-BottomPoint Codes
StringSpecifies point codes to the insidepoint on the bottom link.
Inside-BottomPoint Codes
StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Top Link Codes
StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Bottom LinkCodes
StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Right Link Codes
StringSpecifies codes to the top link.Left Link Codes
GenericPavementStructure | 117
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
StringSpecifies codes for the enclosedshape of the structure.
Shape Codes
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed widthand tie the point on the top link whichdefines “width” to an offset alignment.
AlignmentWidth
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed slopeand tie the point on the top link whichdefines “width” to an offset profile.
ProfileEdge Elevation
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Left / RightIndicates which side the subassembly is in-serted towards.
Side
Numeric, positiveTotal width of the top link including the ef-fective shift width.
Top Width
Numeric, positiveTotal bottom width of the pavement struc-ture including the shift width and width dueto the deflected outer face.
Bottom Width
Numeric, positiveDepth from top link to the bottomDepth
NumericCross slope of the structure.Cross Slope
118 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Behavior
This subassembly builds a skeletal subassembly that lets you specify variousparameters. All point, link, and shape codes can be user-defined as needed.Additionally, this subassembly can get slopes from a runtime logicalassignments (profile), or from the superelevation specified on the alignment.It can also assign the width from an offset alignment.
While defining an assembly, you can assign the width of the previoussubassembly (the one above), plus a shift width to the subassembly, so thatstepped layers are possible.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the subassembly draws the lane using the input parametervalues.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LaneBrokenBackCreates a cross-sectional representation of travel lanes for a broken-backroadway, where the inside and outside lanes have different downward slopes.
This subassembly is used for the inside lanes on divided, broken-back highways.The pavement structure follows the standards described in “Pavement Structureon Paved Sections” in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.
LaneBrokenBack | 119
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly
Side
NoYes / NoSpecifies that inside edge oftravelway to be coded asCrown
Crown Point on Inside
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the inside lanesInside Width12.0 ft
- 2.0 (%)NumericDefault % Slope of the insidelanes to be used if the superel-
Inside Default %Slope
evation for the alignment isnot defined
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the outside lanesOutside Width12.0 ft
120 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
- 2.0 (%)NumericDefault % Slope of the out-side lanes to be used if the
Outside Default %Slope
superelevation for the align-ment is not defined
0.025 mNumeric, postiiveThickness of the Pave1 layer(zero to omit)
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer(zero to omit)
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Base layerBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed InsideWidth and tie the edge-of-inside-lane to anoffset alignment
AlignmentInside Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed OutsideWidth and tie the edge-of-outside-lane toan offset alignment
AlignmentOutside Width
OptionalMay be used to override the normal slopeand tie the elevation of the edge-of-inside-lane to the elevation of a profile
ProfileInside Elevation
OptionalMay be used to override the normal slopeand tie the elevation of the edge-of-outside-lane to the elevation of a profile
ProfileOutside Elevation
LaneBrokenBack | 121
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the inside laneInside %Slope
Numeric% slope of the outside laneOutside %Slope
Behavior
This subassembly creates a set of inside lanes and outside lanes that may havedifferent slopes. The inside lanes are inserted outwards from the attachmentpoint using the Inside Lane superelevation slope. If the superelevation is notdefined at a station, the Inside Default %Slope value is used. The outside lanesare inserted outward from the end of the inside lanes, using the outside lanesuperelevation slope, or the Outside Default %Slope.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subasssembly displays the finish, base, and subbase linksfor the given widths and depths at the default % slopes.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3
Crown point of the corridor (optional)CrownP1
Lane breakpoint on finish gradeLaneP2
Edges of lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P4, P6
Crown point on Pave1 (optional)Crown_Pave1P4
Lane break point on Pave1Lane_Pave1P5
122 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Edges of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P7, P9
Crown point on Pave2 (optional)Crown_Pave2P7
Lane break point on Pave2Lane_Pave2P8
Edges of lane on the Base layerETW_BaseP10, P12
Crown point on base layer (optional)Crown_BaseP10
Lane break point on the Base layerLane_BaseP11
Edges of lane on the Subbase layerETW _SubP13, P15
Crown point on subbase layer (optional)Crown_SubP13
Lane break point on the Subbase layerLane_SubP14
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2
Pave1L3, L4
Pave2L5, L6
BaseL7, L8
SubBaseL9, L10Datum
Pave1S1
Pave2S2
BaseS3
LaneBrokenBack | 123
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
SubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
LaneFromTaperedMedian1Inserts one or more travel lanes outward at a constant grade from an alignmentthat defines the edge of a median that tapers to allow for left-turn lanes.
The alignment defining the edge of the median may at times be either notpresent (Case 1), outside the roadway centerline (Case 2), or inside of thecenterline (Case 3). To use this subassembly you should have separatealignments defining the left and right edges of the median. It may be necessaryto define separate corridor model regions for each individual median.
124 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 125
Attachment
The attachment point is at the location where the inside edge-of-traveled-waywould be if there was no median. This is typically at the assembly baseline,but may be at any marker point on the assembly.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side toplace the subassembly
Side
3.6 mNumericWidth of the lane for thecondition where there is
Lane Width12.0 ft
no median; that is, fromthe attachment point tothe outside edge-of-trav-eled-way.
LOString% slope of the lanes. Theslope can be a numeric
%Slope
value, or can use the fol-lowing codes to matchpre-defined superelevation
126 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
specifications of the base-line alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slope
0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Median Edgealignment is at a fixed off-
Inside Adjustment
set from the actual edge-of-traveled-way (for exam-ple, at the back of curb).Adjusts the calculated LaneWidth to account for theoffset (see diagram).
0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Outside LaneWidth alignment is at a
Outside Adjustment
fixed offset from the actualedge-of-traveled-way (forexample, at the back ofcurb). Adjusts the calculat-ed Lane Width to accountfor the offset (see dia-gram).
0.025 mNumeric, postiiveDepth between finishgrade and Pave1
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andPave2
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andBase
Base Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumericDepth of the Subbase layerat the attachment point
Subbase Depth1.0 ft
LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 127
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to shift the starting offset ofthe lane to follow an edge-of-medianalignment
AlignmentMedian Edge
OptionalMay be used to shift the ending offset ofthe lane to follow an edge-of-lane align-ment
AlignmentLane Width
OptionalMay be used to override the normal laneslope and tie the outer edge of the travellane to the elevation of a profile
ProfileOutside Elevation
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope
Behavior
Outside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The width to the outside edge-of-traveled-waycan be defined by a fixed numeric width, or an alignment can be used tooverride the width. The elevation is determined by applying the specifiedslope for the width of the lane, unless an Outside Elevation profile is given.In that case, the outside edge elevation is tied to the profile, and the slope isadjusted.
The location of the inside edge-of-traveled-way is calculated based on thethree cases shown in the preceding diagram. If no Median Edge alignment isgiven, or the given one is not found at a station, the inside edge is held at theattachment point (Case 1). If a Median Edge alignment is given, and thatalignment is outside the lane’s attachment point, the inside edge is shiftedoutward from the attachment point at lane slope (Case 2). If the Median Edgealignment is inside the lane’s attachment point, the inside edge is shiftedinward from the attachment point at the lane slope (Case 3).
128 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Inside and Outside Adjustments: The Inside Adjustment and OutsideAdjustment parameters are provided in case the alignment used for the medianedge or lane edge is at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way. Forexample, the alignment being used for the Median Edge may be at theback-of-curb instead of at the pavement edge. In this case the InsideAdjustment parameter should be set to the width of the curb.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the lane forthe given width and slope. If a superelevation slope is given (LI or LO), thelinks are displayed at a slope of -2%.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P2
Edges of lane on Pave1 layerETW_Pave1P3, P4
Edges of lane on Pave2 layerETW_Pave2P5, P6
Edges of lane on Base layerETW_BaseP7, P8
Edges of lane on Subbase layerETW _SubP9, P10
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1
Pave1 surfacePave1L2
LaneFromTaperedMedian1 | 129
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Pave2 surfacePave2L3
Base surfaceBaseL4
Subbase surfaceSubBase, DatumL5
Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1
Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2
Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3
Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
LaneFromTaperedMedian2Inserts one or more travel lanes outward from an alignment that defines theedge of a median.
130 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
The alignment defining the edge of the median may at times be either notpresent (Case 1), outside the roadway centerline (Case 2), or inside thecenterline (Case 3).
To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right edges of the median. It may be necessary to define separatecorridor model regions for each individual median. This subassembly differsfrom LaneFromTaperedMedian1 in that it provides for a grade break withdifferent slopes in the travel lanes.
LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 131
Attachment
The attachment point is at the location where the inside edge-of-traveled-waywould be if there was no median. This is typically at the assembly baseline.
132 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates the outward direc-tion of the lane
Side
3.6 mNumericWidth of the inside lane forthe condition where there
Inside Lane Width12.0 ft
is no median; that is, fromthe attachment point tothe grade break point.
LIString% slope of the inside lanes,in the outward direction.
Inside %Slope
The slope can be a numer-ic value, or can use the fol-lowing codes to matchpre-defined superelevationspecifications of the base-line alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slope
3.6 mNumericWidth from the gradebreak point to the outsideedge-of-traveled-way.
Outside Lane Width12.0 ft
LOString% slope of the outsidelanes, in the outward direc-
Outside %Slope
tion. The slope can be anumeric value, or can usethe following codes tomatch pre-defined superel-evation specifications ofthe baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation Type
LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 133
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
LI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slope
0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Median Edgealignment is at a fixed off-
Inside Adjustment
set from the actual edge-of-traveled-way (for exam-ple, at the back of curb).Adjusts the calculated In-side Lane Width to accountfor the offset (see dia-gram).
0.0Numeric, positiveUsed if the Outside LaneWidth alignment is at a
Outside Adjustment
fixed offset from the actualedge-of-traveled-way (forexample, at the back ofcurb). Adjusts the calculat-ed Outside Lane Width toaccount for the offset (seediagram).
0.025 mNumeric, postiiveDepth between finishgrade and Pave1
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andPave2
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveDepth between Pave1 andBase
Base Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumericDepth of the Subbase layerat the attachment point
Subbase Depth1.0 ft
Note that if the Inside %Slope value is always the same as Outside %Slope, orif Inside Lane Width is zero, then the simpler LaneFromTaperedMedian1subassembly can be used instead.
134 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to shift the starting offset ofthe lane to follow an edge-of-medianalignment
AlignmentMedian Edge
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed InsideLane Width and tie the grade break to anoffset alignment
AlignmentInside Lane Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed OutsideLane Width and tie the edge-of-lane toan offset alignment
AlignmentOutside LaneWidth
OptionalMay be used to override the normal laneslope and tie the outer edge of the travellane to the elevation of a profile
ProfileOutside Elevation
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the inside laneInside Lane %Slope
Numeric% slope of the outside laneOutside Lane %Slope
Behavior
Grade Break: The width from the attachment point outwards to the gradebreak between the inside and outside lanes can be defined by a fixed numericwidth, or an alignment can be used to override the width. The elevation atthe grade break is determined by applying the specified slope for the insidelane across the width of the lane.
Outside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The width to the outside edge-of-traveled-waycan be defined by a fixed numeric width, or an alignment can be used tooverride the width. The elevation is determined by applying the specifiedslope for the width of the lane, unless an Outside Elevation profile is given.
LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 135
In that case, the outside edge elevation is tied to the profile, and the slope isadjusted.
Inside Edge-of-Traveled-Way: The location of the inside edge-of-traveled-wayis calculated based on the three cases shown in the previous diagram. If aMedian Edge alignment is given, and that alignment is outside of the lane’sattachment point, the inside edge is shifted outward from the attachmentpoint at the lane slope (Case 2). If the Median Edge alignment is inside of thelane’s attachment point, the inside edge is shifted inward from the attachmentpoint at the inside lane slope (Case 3). If no Median Edge alignment is given,or the given one is not found at a station, the inside edge is held at theattachment point (Case 1).
Inside and Outside Adjustments: The Inside Adjustment and OutsideAdjustment parameters are provided in case the alignments used for the insideor outside edges are at a fixed offset from the actual edge-of-traveled-way. Forexample, the alignment being used for the Median Edge may be at theback-of-curb instead of at the pavement edge. In this case, the InsideAdjustment parameter should be set to the width of the curb.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the lanes forthe given widths and slopes. If a superelevation slope is given (LI or LO), thelinks are displayed at a slope of -2%.
136 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3
Edges of lane on Pave1 layerETW_Pave1P4, P6
Edges of lane on Pave2 layerETW_Pave2P7, P9
Edges of lane on Base layerETW_BaseP10, P12
Edges of lane on Subbase layerETW _SubP13, P15
Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP2
Crown (grade break) on Pave1Crown_Pave1P5
Crown (grade break) on Pave2Crown_Pave2P8
Crown (grade break) on BaseCrown_BaseP11
Crown (grade break) on SubbaseCrown_SubbaseP14
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2
Pave1 surfacePave1L3, L4
Pave2 surfacePave2L5, L6
Base surfaceBaseL7, L8
Subbase surfaceSubBase, DatumL9, L10
Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1
Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2
LaneFromTaperedMedian2 | 137
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3
Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
LaneInsideSuperCreates a cross-sectional representation of finish grade, base layer, and subbaselayer for a travel lane, applying the Inside Lane superelevation slope value forthe corridor model’s baseline alignment.
It is used for the inside lanes on divided, broken-back highways. The pavementstructure follows the standards described in “Pavement Structure on PavedSections” in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.
138 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side toplace the subassembly
Side
NoYes / NoSpecifies that inside edgeof travelway to be codedas Crown
Crown Point on Inside
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from theoffset of the inside edge to
Width12.0 ft
the offset of the outsideedge
-2.0NumericDefault % Slope of thelane to be used when the
Default %Slope
superelevation slope of thealignment is not defined
LaneInsideSuper | 139
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.025 mNumeric, postiiveThickness of the Pave1 lay-er (zero to omit)
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 lay-er (zero to omit)
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Base layerBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Subbaselayer
Subbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed laneWidth and tie the edge-of-lane to an offsetalignment
AlignmentWidth
OptionalMay be used to override the normal laneslope and tie the outer edge of the travellane to the elevation of a profile
ProfileOutside Elevation
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope
Behavior
The Inside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, afinish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width,depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at eitherend of the lane.
140 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subasssembly displays the lane links using the givenwidth and depths at a slope of -2%.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Edge-of-traveled-way on finish gradeETWP1
Crown point on finish grade (optional)CrownP1
Outside edge of lane on finish gradeLaneP2
Edge-of-traveled-way on the Pave1 layerETW_Pave1P3
Crown point on the Pave1 layer (optional)Crown_Pave1P3
Outside edge of lane on the Pave1 layerLane_Pave1P4
Edge-of-traveled-way on the Pave2 layerETW_Pave2P5
Crown point on the Pave2 layer (optional)Crown_Pave2P5
Outside edge of lane on the Pave2 layerLane_Pave2P6
LaneInsideSuper | 141
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Edge-of-traveled-way edge of lane on theBase layer
ETW_BaseP7
Crown point on base layer (optional)Crown_BaseP7
Outside edge of lane on the Base layerLane_BaseP8
Edge-of-traveled-way edge of lane on thesubbase layer
ETW _SubP9
Crown point on subbase layer (optional)Crown_SubP9
Outside edge of lane on the Subbaselayer
Lane_SubP10
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1
Pave1L2
Pave2L3
Base surfaceBaseL4
Subbase surfaceSubBaseL5Datum
Pave1S1
Pave2S2
BaseS3
SubbaseS4
142 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Coding Diagram
LaneOutsideSuperCreates a cross-sectional representation of a travel lane, applying the OutsideLane superelevation slope value for the corridor model’s baseline alignment.
It is used for most undivided roads, or divided roads with no lane slope breakon either side. It may also be used for the outside lanes of divided crownedor broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows the standardsdescribed in “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in the Autodesk Civil3D Help.
LaneOutsideSuper | 143
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly
Side
NoYes / NoSpecifies that inside edge of travel-way to be coded as Crown
Crown Point on In-side
144 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from the offsetof the inside edge to the offset ofthe outside edge
Width12.0 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft
-2.0%NumericDefault % Slope of the lane to beused when the superelevation slopefor the alignment is not defined
Default %Slope
0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave1 layer (zeroto omit)
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer (zeroto omit).
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedlane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment.
AlignmentWidth
OptionalMay be used to override the nor-mal lane slope and tie the outer
Profile nameOutside Elevation
edge of the travel lane to the ele-vation of a profile.
LaneOutsideSuper | 145
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope
Behavior
The Outside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, afinish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width,depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at eitherend of the lane.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all lane links using the width anddepth input parameters at a -2% slope.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Crown point on finish grade (optional)CrownP1
Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP2
Crown point on the Pave1 layer (optional)Crown_Pave1P3
Inside edge of lane on Pave.ETW_Pave1P4
Crown point on the Pave2 layer (optional)Crown_Pave2P5
Inside edge of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P6
Crown point on base grade (optional)Crown_BaseP7
146 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Inside edge of lane on BaseETW_BaseP8
Crown point on subbase grade (optional)Crown_SubP9
Inside edge of lane on SubbaseETW_SubP10
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1
Pave1 surfacePave1L2
Pave2 surfacePave2L3
Base surfaceBaseL4
Subbase surfaceSubbaseL5Datum
Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1
Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2
Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3
Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
LaneOutsideSuper | 147
LaneOutsideSuperWithWideningThis subassembly inserts a travel lane, applying the Outside Lane superelevationslope value, and widens the pavement at superelevated regions.
It can be used for most undivided roads, or divided roads with no lane slopebreak on either side. It may also be used for the outside lanes of dividedcrowned or broken-back highways. The pavement structure follows thestandards described in “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in the AutodeskCivil 3D Help. The only difference between this subassembly and theLaneOutsideSuper subassembly is that this subassembly also widens thepavement width in superelevated regions of the corridor.
148 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place thesubassembly
Side
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from the offsetof the inside edge to the offset ofthe outside edge
Width12.0 ft
-2.0NumericDefault % slope of the lane to beused when the superelevation slopefor the alignment is not defined
Default %Slope
0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave1 layer (zeroto omit)
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer (zeroto omit)
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft
10 mNumeric, positiveLength of the vehicle wheelbase,including front overhang
Wheelbase Length33 ft
LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening | 149
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
1Integer, positiveNumber of planned travel lanes inthis subassembly
Number of TravelLanes
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedlane Width and tie the edge-of-lane to an offset alignment
AlignmentWidth
OptionalMay be used to override the nor-mal lane slope and tie the outer
Profile nameOutside Elevation
edge of the travel lane to the ele-vation of a profile
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope
Behavior
The Outside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment. Starting at the attachment point, afinish grade surface and parallel subgrade are inserted using the given width,depth, and the superelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at eitherend of the lane.
Lane Widening
If the current station is within a superelevated region, then the lane widthvalue is calculated as follows:
Width = Default Width + Pavement Widening
where Pavement Widening =
150 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
n = Number of lanes
R = Radius of the alignment at full superelevation
L = Length of wheelbase including the front overhang
The lane should be widened starting from the "End Normal Crown" and bythe time "full super" station lane should be "default width + pavementwidening". If spirals are used, typically this widening transition length is equalto the length of the spiral.
The key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows:
1 Set pavement widening to zero.
2 Get the default width from parameters.
3 Verify whether a station is in Superelevation zone or not.
4 If Yes, then find the radius of curvature at full super station (not currentstation).
5 Compute the pavement widening value from the equation mentionedin the spec (ExtraW).
6 Find out the station value of "End Normal Crown" in this region; andsimilarly find station value of "Full Super"; find the difference as lengthalong alignment to distribute (L).
7 Now, divide ExtraW by L and get that factor RateW.
8 Now, for the current station, find the difference between "end normalcrown" station and current station (DeltaL).
9 Now, multiply RateW by DeltaL to get DeltaW for the current station.
10 Now add this DeltaW to the default Width provided in the subassemblyproperties.
11 Hence, the new width at the current station is = Width+DeltaW.
This DeltW is the only parameter (note that it is not an input parameter) thatwe could show in the following diagram.
LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening | 151
The preceding diagram is not accurate, but indicative. The black line representscenterline and the blue lines on left and right denotes edges of different laneson right and left sides (after design). The light (gray) coloured lines in thediagram indicate original right and left edges. The deviation of the designededges are due to provision of extra widening.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all lane links using the width anddepth input parameters at a -2% slope.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP2
Inside edge of lane on Pave1.ETW_Pave1P4
Inside edge of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P6
Inside edge of lane on BaseETW_BaseP8
152 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Inside edge of lane on SubbaseETW_SubP10
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1
Pave1 surfacePave1L2
Pave2 surfacePave2L3
Base surfaceBaseL4
Subbase surfaceSubbaseL5
Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1
Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2
Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3
Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
LaneParabolicCreates a cross-sectional representation of finish grade, pavement, and subbasefor urban, parabolic lanes between the left and right edges of traveled way.
LaneParabolic | 153
The parabolic shape is simulated by a series of short, straight-line links. Nosuperelevation is applied to the travel lanes. The pavement structure followsthe standards described in “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in theAutodesk Civil 3D Help.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the crown of road on the finish grade surface. Thiscomponent is symmetrical about the attachment point.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.10 mNumeric, positiveHeight from the center point of thestring line to the crown of road
Crown Height0.3333 ft.
7.2 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the roadway from the leftedge-of-traveled-way to the rightedge-of-traveled-way
Width24.0 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the finish grade andthe Pave1 surface
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the Pave1 and Pave2surfaces
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
154 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.100 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the Pave2 and Basesurfaces
Base Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric, positiveDepth between the Base and Subbasesurfaces
Subbase Depth1.0 ft
0 (%)Numeric% slope of the string line from the leftETW to the right ETW
%Slope
8Numeric, positive,even
Number of straight line incrementssimulating the parabolic shape
No. Increments
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The center of the string line is calculated by subtracting the Crown Heightfrom the attachment point, and the left and right edges-of-traveled-way arecalculated by applying the Width and Slope symmetrically about theattachment point. The ordinates of the parabolic curve are calculated at evenintervals along the string line, and straight line links are added to connect theordinate points. Parallel surfaces are inserted for the Pave1, Pave2, Base, andSubbase surfaces from the given depths.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the lane links calculated from thegiven input parameters.
LaneParabolic | 155
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Outside edges of lane on finish gradeETW
Outside edges of lane on the Base sur-face
ETW_Pave1
Outside edges of lane on subbaseETW_Pave2
Crown point on finish gradeCrown
Crown point on Pave1Crown_Pave1
Crown point on Pave2Crown_Pave2
Crown point on BaseCrown_Base
Crown point on subbaseCrown_Sub
Finish gradeTopPave
Pave1 surfacePave1
Pave2 surfacePave2
Base surfaceBase
Subbase surfaceSubBaseDatum
Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1
Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2
156 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3
Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
LaneTowardCrownCreates a cross-sectional representation of a travel lane that is being insertedfrom the inside edge of pavement towards the crown point.
It uses the Outside Lane superelevation slope value for the corridor model’sbaseline alignment. The pavement structure follows the standards describedin “Pavement Structure on Paved Sections” in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.
LaneTowardCrown | 157
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of lane on the finish grade surface.This component can be attached to either the left or right side.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to place the sub-assembly
Side
3.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the lane from the offset ofthe inside edge to the offset of theoutside edge
Width12.0 ft
0.025 mNumeric, postiiveThickness of the Pave1 layer (zero toomit)
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Pave2 layer (zero toomit)
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Base layerBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric, positiveThickness of the Subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed laneWidth value and tie the edge-of-laneto an offset alignment
AlignmentWidth
158 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the normallane slope and tie the outer edge of
ProfileCrown Elevation
the travel lane to the elevation of aprofile
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the laneLane %Slope
Behavior
The Inside Lane superelevation slope is obtained from the superelevationspecifications for the baseline alignment, and the algebraic sign of this valueis reversed. If inserting to the left, the Right Outside Lane Slope is obtainedand reversed; if inserting to the right, the Left Outside Lane Slope is obtainedand reversed. Starting at the attachment point, a finish grade surface andparallel subgrade are inserted using the given width, depth, and the reversesuperelevation slope. Vertical links close the shape at either end of the lane.
If an offset horizontal alignment name is assigned to the Width during corridormodeling, the width of the lane will vary to match the offset of the alignment.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the finish, base, and subbase linksfor the given width and depths at a -2% slope.
LaneTowardCrown | 159
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP1
Outside edge of lane (at the crown point) onfinish grade
CrownP2
Inside edge of lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P3
Outside edge of lane on Pave1Crown_Pave1P4
Inside edge of lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P5
Outside edge of lane on Pave2Crown_Pave2P6
Inside edge of lane on the base layerETW_BaseP7
Outside edge of lane on the base layerCrown_BaseP8
Inside edge of lane on the subbase layerETW_SubP9
Outside edge of lane on the subbase layerCrown_SubP10
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1
Pave1L2
Pave2L3
BaseL4
SubbaseL5Datum
Pave1S1
160 | Chapter 1 Subassembly Reference
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, or Shape
Pave2S2
BaseS3
SubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
LaneTowardCrown | 161
Subassembly Reference(continued)
In this chapter
■ LinkMulti
■ LinkOffsetAndElevation
■ LinkOffsetAndSlope
■ LinkOffsetOnSurface
■ LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection
■ LinkSlopesBetweenPoints
■ LinkSlopeToElevation
■ LinkSlopeToSurface
■ LinkToMarkedPoint
■ LinkVertical
■ LinkWidthAndSlope
■ MarkPoint
■ MedianDepressed
■ MedianDepressedShoulderExt
■ MedianDepressedShoulderVert
■ MedianFlushWithBarrier
■ MedianRaisedConstantSlope
■ MedianRaisedWithCrown
■ OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges
2
163
■ OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters
■ OverlayCrownBetweenEdges
■ OverlayMedianAsymmetrical
■ OverlayMedianSymmetrical
■ OverlayMillAndLevel1
■ OverlayMillAndLevel2
■ OverlayParabolic
■ OverlayWidenMatchSlope1
■ OverlayWidenMatchSlope2
■ OverlayWidenWithSuper1
164 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
LinkMultiThis subassembly is a general purpose subassembly to add a series of connectedlinks.
This is typically used to add structural shapes that are not pre-defined assubassemblies. Up to 12 links may be specified. If a shape requires more than12 links, the LinkMulti subassembly can be used multiple times.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the first link. The subassemblyis sensitive to the direction being inserted. Positive widths increase the offsetfrom the attachment point in the direction inserted.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightSpecifies which side to placethe subassembly
Side
0Numeric, positive inte-ger
The number of links used todraw the shape
No. of Links
Top, DatumComma-separatedstring
A list of codes to be assignedto the link
Link Codes
LinkMulti | 165
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0Numeric+/- width of the first link. Posi-tive widths are in the directionof insertion.
dW1
0Numeric+/- vertical deflection of thefirst link
dZ1
0Numeric+/- width of the 2nd linkdW2
0Numeric+/- vertical deflection of the2nd link
dZ2
0Numeric. . .. . .(links 3 – 11)
0Numeric+/- width of the 12th linkdW12
0Numeric+/- vertical deflection of the12th link
dZ12
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
Up to 12 links are inserted in sequence at the given widths and verticaldeflections. Shapes are not automatically closed; a closing link must beincluded.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links defined by the inputparameters.
166 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
Points are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the first link from 1up to 13. Links are numbered sequentially from 1 up to 12.
LinkOffsetAndElevationThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from theattachment point to a specified offset and elevation.
An alignment can be substituted for the offset, and a profile for the elevation.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The direction of the linkis determined by the location of the given offset and elevation relative to theattachment point.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
3.0 mNumeric+/- offset of the end of the linkOffsetfrom Baseline10.0 ft
LinkOffsetAndElevation | 167
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericElevation at the end of the linkElevation
P2Comma-separatedstring
A list of surface codes to be assignedto the outside edge of the link
Point Codes
Top, DatumComma-separatedstring
A list of codes to be assigned to thelink
Link Codes
Include link,start point andend point
Selection listAdd the link, the start point, and theend point, or omit the link and addthe end point only.
Omit Link
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Off-set and tie the end-of-link to an offsetalignment
AlignmentOffset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Ele-vation and tie the end-of-link to a pro-file
ProfileElevation
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
168 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given offset and elevation.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays a horizontal link using the givenOffset input parameters as the width.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LinkOffsetAndSlopeThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from theattachment point to a specified offset at a given slope.
An alignment can be substituted for the offset, and a profile for the slope.
LinkOffsetAndSlope | 169
Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The direction of the linkis determined by the location of the given offset and elevation relative to theattachment point.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
10.0 mNumeric+/- offset of the end of the linkOffset from Baseline33.0 ft
% slopeSelection list:True if the slope value is a % slope.Slope Type %% slopeFalse if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1)
slope. X:1 slope
2 (%), (or2:1)
Numeric% slope of the link. Negative slopes godownward in the direction inserted
Slope
P2Comma-separat-ed string
A list of surface codes to be assignedto the outside edge of the link
Point Codes
Top, DatumComma-separat-ed string
A list of codes to be assigned to thelink
Link Codes
Include link,start point
Selection listAdd the link, the start point, and theend point, or omit the link and add theend point only.
Omit Link
and endpoint
170 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Offsetand tie the end-of-link to an offset align-ment
AlignmentOffset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Slopeand tie the end-of-link to a profile
ProfileSlope
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given offset at the givenslope.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link calculated from the givenoffset and slope parameters.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
LinkOffsetAndSlope | 171
Coding Diagram
LinkOffsetOnSurfaceThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link from theattachment point to a given offset on a target surface.
An alignment can be used when building a corridor model to calculate theoffset.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0Numeric+/- offset to tie the link into the targetsurface
Offset from Base-line
172 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
P2Comma-separatedstring
A list of surface codes to be assigned tothe outside edge of the link
Point Codes
Top, DatumComma-separatedstring
A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes
Include link, startpoint and endpoint
Selection listAdd the link, the start point, and theend point, or omit the link and add theend point only.
Omit Link
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedOffset and tie the end-of-link to anoffset alignment
AlignmentOffset
RequiredName of the surface the link is ty-ing to
SurfaceTarget Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
Behavior
A link is extended to the point on the target surface at the given offset.
LinkOffsetOnSurface | 173
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link drawn to the given offsetat a -4 : 1 slope. The link terminates with an arrowhead pointing outwards.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflectionThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link at a slope for avertical deflection distance.
A profile can be given for the vertical deflection when building a corridormodel.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.
174 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
% SlopeSelection list:True if the slope value is a % slope.Slope Type %% slopeFalse if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1) slope.X:1 slope
2 (%), (or2:1)
Numeric, positive,nonzero
% or ratio slope of the link.Slope
3.0 mNumeric.non-zero
+/- Vertical deflection between the beginning andend of the link
Vertical Deflec-tion 10.0 ft
P2Comma-sepa-rated string
A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outsideedge of the link
Point Codes
Top, Da-tum
Comma-sepa-rated string
A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes
FalseTrue / FalseFalse to add the link, the start point, and the endpoint.True to add the end point only.
Omit Link
Runtime Logical Assignments
DescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Vertical Deflection andtie the end-of-link to a profile
ProfileVertical Deflection
LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection | 175
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point in the direction of insertion forthe given slope until it reaches the given elevation. If a profile name is specifiedat runtime, the vertical deflection is adjusted to match the profile elevation.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given slope andvertical deflection.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LinkSlopesBetweenPointsThis subassembly is used to insert intersecting links between two points.
176 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
It is typically used to place intersecting slopes to a V-ditch between the edgesof two adjacent or merging roadways. A flat-bottomed ditch can also bespecified.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the outside edge of either the left or rightintersecting slope, and the previously defined marked point must be on theopposite outside edge. It does not matter which point is left or right of theother. When prompted for marker point, choose attachment point. Be sureto name the marked point and set the marked point name in this subassembly.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName of the previously defined marked pointMarked Point Name
-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from theattachment point. Negative slope values aredownward.
Slope 1
-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward from themarked point
Slope 2
0.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero fora V-ditch)
Ditch Width2 ft
LinkSlopesBetweenPoints | 177
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The locations of the attachment point and marked point are determined. Themarked point may be either to the right or left of the attachment point. Linksare extended inward at Slope 1 from the attachment point, and Slope 2 fromthe marked point, until they intersect. If a non-zero ditch width is given, ahorizontal bottom-of-ditch link is fit into the intersecting side slopes.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the intersecting linksand optional ditch bottom based on the input parameters given and therelative locations of the attachment and marked points.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, orShape
For non-zero ditch width, the edge of ditch closest to theattachment point.
Ditch_InDitch
P2
If the ditch width is zero, use Ditch.
For non-zeroditch width, the edge of ditch closest to themarked point
RMedDitchP3
Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median linksTopL1 – L3Datum
178 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
LinkSlopeToElevationThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link at a given slopeuntil it reaches a defined elevation or profile.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassem-bly
Side
% slopeSelection list:% slope if the slope value is a % slope.Slope Type % ?% slopeX : 1 if the slope value is a ratio (X : 1)
slope. X:1 slope
LinkSlopeToElevation | 179
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2 (%), (or 2:1)Numeric, posi-tive
% or ratio slope of the link. Negativeslopes go downward in the direction insert-ed.
Slope
0.0NumericElevation value to extend the link to at thegiven slope
Target Elevation
P2Comma-sepa-rated string
A list of surface codes to be assigned tothe outside edge of the link
Point Codes
Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string
A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes
Include link,start point andend point
Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the endpoint, or omits the link and adds the endpoint only.
Omit Link
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Target Elevation and tiethe end-of-link to a profile
ProfileTarget Elevation
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
180 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point in the direction of insertion forthe given slope until it reaches the target elevation or profile. The slope valueis applied upward if the target elevation is above the attachment point,otherwise a negative slope is used.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given slope for ahorizontal distance of 3 meters or 10 feet.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LinkSlopeToSurfaceThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to extend a link from theattachment point at a given slope to the closest intersection with a targetsurface.
LinkSlopeToSurface | 181
Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
% SlopeSelectionlist:
True if the slope value is a % slope.False if the slope value is a ratio (x : 1) slope.
Slope Type %
% slopeX:1 slope
2 (%), (or 2:1)Numeric% slope of the link. Negative slopes go downwardin the direction inserted.
Slope
P2Comma-sep-arated string
A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outsideedge of the link
Point Codes
Top, DatumComma-sep-arated string
A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes
Include link,start point andend point
Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the end point,or omits the link and adds the end point only.
Omit Link
182 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the surface the link istying to
SurfaceTarget Surface
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
Behavior
A link is extended to the left or right from the attachment point at the givenslope until it intersects the target surface.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly attempts to find the intersection of the link,if the target surface was inserted by a previous subassembly. If an intersectionis found, the link is displayed at the given slope to the surface. If not, the linkis displayed at the given slope outward for a horizontal distance of 3 metersor 10 feet, terminating in an arrowhead pointing outward.
LinkSlopeToSurface | 183
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LinkToMarkedPointThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to connect a link from theattachment point to a previously named marked point.
It can be used in a variety of situations, including connecting between adjacentroadways where the relative offsets and elevations vary, or across a gore areabetween converging roadways. Use the MarkPoint subassembly if theconnecting point has not already been named.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The link may go in anydirection. The direction is determined by the location of the marked pointrelative to the attachment point. Be sure to name the marked point and setthe marked point name in this subassembly.
184 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName of the marked point to connect toMarked PointName
Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string
A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes
Include link, startpoint and endpoint
Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the endpoint, or omits the link and adds the endpoint only.
Omit Link
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given marked point.
LinkToMarkedPoint | 185
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link between the attachmentpoint and the marked point.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LinkVerticalThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to add a vertical surface link byvertical deflection.
A profile can be used when building a corridor model to allow variable verticaldeflection.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.
186 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
3.0 mNumeric+/- vertical deflection from the attachment point.Negative deflections are downward.
Vertical Deflection10.0 ft
P2Comma-sepa-rated string
A list of surface codes to be assigned to the out-side edge of the link
Point Codes
Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string
A list of codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes
Include link,start point andend point
Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the end point,or omits the link and adds the end point only.
Omit Link
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Vertical Deflection andtie the end-of-link to a profile
ProfileVertical Deflection
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
LinkVertical | 187
Behavior
A vertical link is added from the attachment point for the given verticaldeflection. If a profile name is given for the Vertical Deflection, the end ofthe link will match the profile elevation.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link for the given +/- verticaldeflection.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
LinkWidthAndSlopeThis subassembly is a general purpose utility to add a surface link by specifyingits width and slope.
Either a % slope or ratio slope value may be given. An alignment or profilecan be used when building a corridor model to allow variable width and slope.
188 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the link. This subassembly canbe inserted in the left or right direction from the attachment point.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
LeftLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
3.0Numeric, posi-tive
Width of the lane from the offset of the inside edgeto the offset of the outside edge
Width10.0 ft
% slopeSelection list:Specifies whether the slope value represents a % slopeor an x : 1 slope.
Slope Type% slopex : 1 slope
2 (%), (or2:1)
Numeric% slope of the link. Negative slopes go downward inthe direction inserted.
Slope
P2Comma-separat-ed string
A list of surface codes to be assigned to the outsideedge of the link
Point Codes
Top, Da-tum
Comma-separat-ed string
A list of surface codes to be assigned to the linkLink Codes
Includelink, start
Selection listAdds the link, the start point, and the end point, oromits the link and adds the end point only.
Omit Link
point andend point
LinkWidthAndSlope | 189
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed link Width and tie the
AlignmentWidth
end-of-link to an offset align-ment
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed % Slope and tie the end-of-link to a profile
Profile%Slope
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the linkBegin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
Behavior
The link is added in the direction of insertion starting at the attachment pointand going the given width and slope. If an offset horizontal alignment nameis assigned to the Width during corridor modeling, the width of the lane willvary to match the offset of the alignment. If a profile name is assigned to theSlope, the slope is adjusted to match the profile elevation at the end of thelink.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the link at the given width andslope.
190 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
Coding Diagram
MarkPointThis subassembly is used to mark an existing point on the assembly with aname.
This is usually done so that other subassemblies can later insert links thatattach back to this point (for example, LinkToMarkedPoint). The attachmentpoint is the point that is marked. You can add user-defined point coodes tothis marked point.
In the example below, there are two roadways with independent profiles.Once the links for the first roadway are created, the point at the left outsideedge is being marked. Later, after the links for the second roadway are created,a link can be inserted from its right outside edge back to the marked point.
Attachment
The marked point name is placed at the attachment point.
MarkPoint | 191
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName to mark the attachment point withPoint Name
MarkedPointStringSpecify point codes at this location as needed,comma-separated, if multiple
Point Codes
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
A name is assigned to the selected attachment point. This point can bereferenced by name in subassemblies added later to the assembly.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws a triangle symbol at the location ofthe marked point, and labels the marked point name above the point.
192 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link
Marked point codeMarkedPointP1
Coding Diagram
None.
MedianDepressedThis subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed medianbetween the attachment point and a previously named marked point.
Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not alreadybeen marked.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the outside edge of either the left or right medianditch slope, and the previously defined marked point must be on the oppositeoutside edge. It does not matter which point is left or right of the other.
MedianDepressed | 193
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName of the previously defined marked pointMarked PointName
-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward fromthe attachment point
Slope 1
-4 ( : 1)NumericSlope (x : 1) of the link extending inward fromthe marked point
Slope 2
Hold ditchsideslopes,
Selection listFor the cases where the top-of-ditch-slopepoints are at unequal elevations, selects
Hold DitchSlopes
shift ditchfrom center
whether to hold the ditch sideslopes and letthe position of the ditch shift, or to hold theditch at the center and adjust the sideslope onthe high side.
0.6 mNumeric, positiveWidth of the bottom of the median ditch (zerofor a V-ditch)
Ditch Width2 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The locations of the attachment point and marked point are determined. Themarked point may be either to the right or left of the attachment point. Linksare extended inward at Slope 1 from the attachment point, and at Slope 2
194 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
from the marked point, until they intersect. If a ditch width is given, ahorizontal bottom-of-ditch link is fit into the intersecting side slopes.
Ditch Slopes
The top of the ditch slopes may be at different elevations on the left and rightsides, resulting in an asymmetrical ditch. There are two options for handlingthis situation. If Hold Ditch Slopes is set to True, then the Slope 1 and Slope2 values are held on both sides, shifting the bottom of ditch away from thecenterline towards the lower side. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centeredabout the midpoint offset between the tops-of-slopes, the given slope is heldon the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to match on the higher side.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
Left edge of median ditchLMedDitchP2
MedianDepressed | 195
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
Right edge of median ditchRMedDitchP3
Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median linksTopL1 – L3Datum
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median linksbased on the input parameters given and the relative locations of theattachment point and marked point.
Coding Diagram
MedianDepressedShoulderExtThis subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed medianwith inside shoulders, using extended termination of shoulder subbase.
It supports superelevation pivoting about the attachment point at thecenterline, or about the attachment point elevation at the insideedges-of-traveled-way. The pavement structure on the paved portions of theshoulder follows the standards described in "Pavement Structure of PavedSections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.
196 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is above the centerline of the ditch. The location of themedian links relative to the attachment point varies depending on the pivotmethod, and in some cases, the median widths and lane slopes. The attachmentpoint is typically placed on the baseline alignment at the design profileelevation.
MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 197
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero fora V-ditch)
Ditch Width2 ft
25%Numeric,positive
Inward slope from the shoulders toward the bottomof ditch (x : 1)
Ditch Slope
Hold ditchsideslopes,
Selectionlist
For the cases where the top-of-ditch-slope pointsare at unequal elevations, selects whether to hold
Hold Ditch Slopes
shift ditchthe ditch sideslopes and let the position of the ditchfrom cen-ter
shift, or to hold the ditch at the center and adjustthe sideslope on the high side
Pivotabout cen-terline
Selectionlist
Select whether the profile grade and pivot point isat the centerline above the median ditch, or if it isheld at the inside edges-of-traveled-ways
Centerline Pivot?
6.6 mNumeric,positive
Width from the median centerline to the left insideedge-of-traveled-way
Left Median Width22 ft
6.6 mNumeric,positive
Width from the median centerline to the right in-side edge-of-traveled-way
Right Median Width22 ft
0.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the paved inside shoulderPaved ShoulderWidth 2.0 ft
0.0Numeric,positive
Width that the Pave1 layer extends beyond theedge-of-shoulder. The bottom of the Pave1 layermay not extend beyond the ditch sideslope.
Pave1 Extension
0.0Numeric,positive
Width that the Pave2 layer extends beyond theedge-of-shoulder. This should be equal to or greater
Pave2 Extension
198 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
than the Pave1 extension. The bottom of the Pave2layer may not extend beyond the ditch sideslope.
0.0Numeric,positive
Width that the Base layer extends beyond the edge-of-shoulder. This should be equal to or greater than
Base Extension
the Pave2 extension. If a large value is used, theBase layer is terminated at the intersection with theditch slope.The Base layer should not extend be-yond the ditch sideslope.
0.025 m,Numeric,positive
Depth between the paved shoulders’ finish gradeand Pave1 surfaces
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 m,Numeric,positive
Depth between the paved shoulders’ Pave1 andPave2 surfaces
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth between the paved shoulders’ Pave2 andBase surfaces
Base Depth0.333 ft
0.3 mNumeric,positive
Depth between the paved shoulders’ Base andSubbase surfaces
Subbase Depth1 ft
0Numeric,positive
Width of the optional turning lane on the left sideLeft Turn Lane Width
0Numeric,positive
Width of the optional turning lane on the right sideRight Turn LaneWidth
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override theDitch Slope and tie the medi-
ProfileDitch Slope
an bottom-of-ditch to a pro-file
MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 199
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Median Width and
AlignmentLeft Median Width
tie the left inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offsetalignment.
OptionalMay be used to ovrride thefixed Right Median Width
AlignmentRight Median Width
and tie the right inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offsetalignment
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly cannot be inserted separately for the left and right sides. Itbuilds the median to both sides of the attachment point.
Superelevation Pivot Point
The median can be configured to have the pivot point at the centerline, or atthe inside edges of traveled ways. If Centerline Pivot is used, the left and rightoutside lane superelevation slopes are obtained from the baseline’ssuperelevation specifications, and the elevations of the insideedges-of-traveled-ways are calculated by applying these slopes to the left andright median widths from the attachment point. If Centerline Pivot is notused, the edges-of-traveled-ways are held to the elevation of the attachmentpoint.
Ditch Elevations and Slopes
Superelevation or turning lanes may cause the top of the ditch slopes to be atdifferent elevations on the left and right sides, resulting in an asymmetricalditch. There are two options for handling this situation. If Hold Ditch Slopesis set to True, then the given ditch slopes are held constant on both sides,which shifts the bottom of ditch away from the centerline towards the lowerside. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centered about the median centerline,the given slope is held on the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to matchon the higher side.
200 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Shoulder Treatment
The paved shoulders follow the slopes defined for the left and right insideshoulder slopes for the baseline alignment’s superelevation specifications.These slopes are applied inward from the inside edges of traveled ways. Thesubbase surfaces follows the same slope as the finished grade, and is extendedinwards to the intersections with the ditch slopes.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median andshoulders based on the input parameters given, with lane slopes of -2%, pavedshoulder slopes of -5%, and turning lane widths of zero.
MedianDepressedShoulderExt | 201
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
As shown belowPoints
As shown belowLinks
Pave1S1
Pave2S2
BaseS3
SubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
202 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
MedianDepressedShoulderVertThis subassembly creates a cross-sectional representation of a depressed medianwith inside shoulders, using vertical termination of shoulder subbase.
It supports superelevation pivoting about the attachment point at thecenterline, or about the attachment point elevation at the insideedges-of-traveled-way. The pavement structure on the paved portions of theshoulder follows the standards described in "Pavement Structure of PavedSections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.
MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 203
Table of SlopesTable of Widths
Ditch of ForeslopeS1DitchW1
Unpaved Shoulder SlopeS2Left MedianW2
Left Inside SuperelevationS3Right MedianW3
204 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Table of SlopesTable of Widths
Right Inside SuperelevationShoulder Slope
S4Paved ShoulderW4
Left Outside Lane SlopeS5Unpaved ShoulderW5
Right Outside Lane SlopeS6Left Turn LaneW6
Right Turn LaneW7
Attachment
The attachment point is above the centerline of the ditch. The location of themedian links relative to the attachment point varies depending on the pivotmethod, and in some cases, the median widths and lane slopes. The attachmentpoint is typically placed on the baseline alignment at the design profileelevation.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the bottom of the median ditch (zero fora V-ditch
Ditch Width2 ft
25%Numeric,positive
Inward slope from the shoulders toward the bottomof ditch (x : 1)
Ditch Slope
Hold ditchsideslopes,
Selectionlist
For the cases where the top-of-ditch-slope pointsare at unequal elevations, selects whether to hold
Hold Ditch Slopes
shift ditchthe ditch sideslopes and let the position of the ditchfrom cen-ter
shift, or to hold the ditch at the center and adjustthe sideslope on the high side.
MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 205
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Pivotabout cen-terline
Selectionlist
Select whether the profile grade and pivot point isat the centerline above the median ditch, or if it isheld at the inside edges-of-traveled-ways
Centerline Pivot?
6.6 mNumeric,positive
Width from the median centerline to the left insideedge-of-traveled-way
Left Median Width22 ft
6.6 mNumeric,positive
Width from the median centerline to the right insideedge-of-traveled-way
Right Median Width22 ft
0.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the paved portion of the inside shoulderPaved ShoulderWidth 2.0 ft
1.2 mNumeric,positive
Width of the unpaved portion of the inside shoulderUnpaved ShoulderWidth 4.0 ft
-6 (%)Numeric% slope of the unpaved portion of the insideshoulder
Unpaved Shoulder%Slope
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between the finish grade and Pave1 surfacePave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between the Pave1 and Pave2 surfacesPave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth between the Pave2 and Base surfacesBase Depth0.333 ft
0.3 mNumeric,positive
Depth between the paved shoulders’ finish gradeand subbase surfaces
Subbase Depth1 ft
0Numeric,positive
Width of the optional turning lane on the left sideLeft Turn Lane Width
0Numeric,positive
Width of the optional turning lane on the right sideRight Turn LaneWidth
206 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the Ditch Slope andtie the median bottom-of-ditch to a profile
ProfileDitch Slope
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Left Medi-an Width and tie the left inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offset alignment
AlignmentLeft Median Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed RightMedian Width and tie the right inside edge-of-traveled-way to an offset alignment
AlignmentRight Median Width
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly cannot be inserted separately for the left and right sides. Itbuilds the median to both sides of the attachment point.
Superelevation Pivot Point
The median can be configured to have the superelevation pivot point at thecenterline, or at the inside edges of traveled ways. If Centerline Pivot is used,the left and right outside lane superelevation slopes are obtained from thebaseline’s superelevation specifications, and the elevations of the insideedges-of-traveled-ways are calculated by applying these slopes to the left andright median widths from the attachment point. If Centerline Pivot is notused, the edges-of-traveled-ways are held to the elevation of the attachmentpoint.
Ditch Elevations and Slopes
Superelevation or turning lanes may cause the top of the ditch slopes to be atdifferent elevations on the left and right sides, resulting in an asymetricalditch. There are two options for handling this situation. If Hold Ditch Slopesis set to True, then the given ditch slopes are held constant on both sides,which shifts the bottom of ditch away from the centerline towards the lowerside. If set to False, the ditch bottom is centered about the median centerline,
MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 207
the given slope is held on the lower side, and the slope is adjusted to matchon the higher side.
Shoulder Treatment
The paved portions of the shoulders follow the slopes defined for the left andright inside shoulder slopes for the baseline alignment’s superelevationspecifications. These slopes are applied inward from the inside edges of traveledways. The unpaved portions of the shoulders are fixed at the given UnpavedShoulder %Slope value.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly calculates and displays the median andshoulders based on the input parameters given, and assuming that the laneslopes are -2% and the paved shoulder slopes are -5%.
208 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, orShape
Edges of paved shoulder on finish gradeEPSP2, P7
Edges of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS_Pave1P10, P17
Edges of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS_Pave2P12, P19
Edges of paved shoulder on BaseEPS_BaseP14, P21
Edges of paved shoulder on SubbaseEPS_SubP16, P23
Edges of gravel shoulderES_UnpavedP3, P6
Left edge of median ditchLMedDitchP4
Right edge of median ditchRMedDitchP5
Finish grade on paved shouldersTopL1, L7Pave
Finish grade on unpaved shoulder and median linksTopL2 – L6Datum
Pave1L8, L12
Pave2L9, L13
BaseL10, L14
SubBaseL11, L15
Subbase and vertical links on paved shouldersDatumL11, L15, L16,L17
MedianDepressedShoulderVert | 209
DescriptionCodePoint, Link, orShape
Pave1S1, S5
Pave2S2, S6
BaseS3, S7
SubbaseS4, S8
Coding Diagram
MedianFlushWithBarrierThis subassembly inserts surfaces to define a flush median with an optionalNew Jersey Barrier.
The pavement structure follows the standards described in “Pavement Structureof Paved Sections" in the Autodesk Civil 3D Help.
210 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is at the center of median on the finish grade surface.This component inserts to the left and right side simultaneously.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Include Barri-er
Selection listTrue shows the New Jersey barrier.False omits the barrier.
Include Barrier
1.2 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width from the median centerline to the left edgeof median
Left Width4.0 ft
1.2 mNumeric, posi-tive
Width from the median centerline to the rightedge of median
Right Width4.0 ft
LINumeric orstring
% slope of the left median surface. The slope canbe a numeric value, or can use the following codes
Left %Slope
MedianFlushWithBarrier | 211
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
to match pre-defined superelevation specificationsof the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (left)LO: outside lane slope (left)
LINumeric orstring
% slope of the right median surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following
Right %Slope
codes to match pre-defined superelevation speci-fications of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slope (right)LO: outside lane slope (right)
0.025mNumeric, posi-tive
Thickness of the Pave1 layer; zero to omitPave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric, posi-tive
Thickness of the Pave2 layer; zero to omit.Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, posi-tive
Thickness of the base layerBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric, posi-tive
Thickness of the subbase layerSubbase Depth1.0 ft
810 mmNumeric, posi-tive
Height of the barrier at the center of medianDimension A(mm or inches) 32 in
232Numeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramDimension B(mm or inches) 9 in
59 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramDimension C(mm or inches) 2 in
125 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramDimension D(mm or inches) 5 in
212 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
557 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramDimension E(mm or inches) 22 in
178 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagramDimension F(mm or inches) 7 in
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Width and tie the left
AlignmentLeft Width
edge-of-median to an offsetalignment
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Right Width and tie the
AlignmentRight Width
right edge-of-median to anoffset alignment
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the left side of the medianLeft %Slope
Numeric% slope of the right side of the medianRight %Slope
Behavior
The pavement structure links are inserted outward left and right of theattachment point for the given widths and slopes. If the Include Barrier valueis True, a New Jersey barrier is inserted symmetrically about the mediancenterline. If alignments are given as runtime logical assignments for the Leftand Right Widths, the widths are adjusted to tie to the alignment offsets ateach station along the corridor.
MedianFlushWithBarrier | 213
If the median is in superelevation with a single constant slope across the entiremedian, the top of the barrier is slanted to match the median slope. Otherwisethe top of the barrier remains horizontal. In all cases, the barrier height(Dimension A) is held constant at the centerline of the barrier.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subasssembly displays all pavement links using the widthand depth input parameters at a -2% slope. If Include Barrier is True, the barrieris displayed with the given dimensions.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
All points on the concrete barrierBarrierAll barrier points
Inside edge of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3
Crown of median on finish gradeCrownP2
Edge-of-traveled-way on Pave1ETW_Pave1P4, P6
Crown on Pave1Crown_Pave1P5
Edge-of-traveled-way on Pave2ETW_Pave2P7, P9
Crown on Pave2Crown_Pave2P8
Edge-of-traveled-way on BaseETW_BaseP10, P12
Crown on BaseCrown_BaseP11
214 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Edge-of-traveled-way on SubbaseETW_SubP13, P15
Crown on SubbaseCrown_SubP14
Top, PaveL1, L2
Pave1L3, L4
Pave2L5, L6
BaseL7, L8
SubbaseL9, L10Datum
BarrierAll barrier links
Area between finish grade and Pave1Pave1S1
Area between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2S2
Area between Pave2 and BaseBaseS3
Area between Base and SubbaseSubbaseS4
Shape inclosed by the barrier.BarrierS5
MedianFlushWithBarrier | 215
Coding Diagram
MedianRaisedConstantSlopeThis subassembly inserts links for a constant-slope raised median between twopoints.
Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not alreadybeen marked.
Attachment
The attachment point may be at either edge of the median finished grade.The marked point must be at the opposite edge.
216 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName of the marked point on the median edge oppositethe attachment point
Marked Point
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth of the median cap. May be zero for an unpavedmedian
Depth0.333 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The top of median link is inserted between the attachment point and markedpoint. If a non-zero Depth is given, the bottom of median link is insertedparallel to the top, and vertical links are added to close the shape.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
Edges of median on finish gradeNoneP1, P2
P3, P4
Top of medianTopL1
Bottom of medianDatumL2
NoneL3, L4
MedianRaisedConstantSlope | 217
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
MedianS1
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly shows the generic layout mode display.
Coding Diagram
MedianRaisedWithCrownThis subassembly inserts links for a constant-slope raised median between twopoints.
Use the MarkPoint subassembly first if the connecting point has not alreadybeen marked.
Attachment
The attachment point may be at either edge of the median finished grade.The marked point must be at the opposite edge.
218 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName of the marked point on the median edge oppositethe attachment point
Marked Point
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth of the median cap. May be zero for an unpavedmedian.
Depth0.333 ft
- 2%Numeric orstring
% slope from the median crown toward the attachmentpoint. The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the
Slope 1
following codes to match pre-defined superelevationspecifications of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slopeSI: inside shoulder slope
- 2%Numeric orstring
Slope from the median crown toward the marked point.The slope can be a numeric value, or can use the following
Slope 2
codes to match pre-defined superelevation specificationsof the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeLI: inside lane slopeLO: outside lane slopeSI: inside shoulder slope
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
MedianRaisedWithCrown | 219
Behavior
The median crown point is calculated by intersecting lines extended betweenthe attachment point and the marked point at the given slopes. If nointersection is found, the median is not inserted. If a non-zero Depth is given,the bottom of the median links are inserted parallel to the top, and verticallinks are added to close the shape.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
NoneP1, P3
Crown of median on finish gradeMedianP2
NoneP4 - P6
Top of medianTopL1, L2
Bottom of median (if given)DatumL3, L4
MedianS1
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly shows the generic layout mode display.
Coding Diagram
220 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdgesThis subassembly is used to overlay a four-lane crowned corridor betweengutter flange points on each side, holding to required slope and breakoverranges. This subassembly differs from OverlayBrokenBackOverGutter becauseit overlays between known flange points, rather than overlaying existing gutterto a known profile on the face of curb.
To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right edges. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces orprofiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curband gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as markedpoints, thus transferring offset and elevation information.
Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. This istypically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode, this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finshed grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be same as crown point, since itsoffset and elevation are computed by edge of pavement data.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
- 18ftNumericDistance between default attachment point to leftedge of pavement. This value is used only if no
Left Flange Offset
alignment or marked point is associated to leftedge.
OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 221
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
6m and18ft
NumericDistance between default attachment point to rightedge of pavement. This value is used only if no
Right Flange Offset
alignment or marked point is associated to rightedge.
NoneStringProvides existing left edge of pavement offset andelevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL)
Left Flange – MarkedPoint
NoneStringProvides existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTION-AL)
Right Flange –Marked Point
0.1m and0.33ft
NumericMinimum depth of overlay at the quarter pointsand crown.
Minimum Overlay
-1%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.
Inside Min %Slope
-4%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.
Inside Max %Slope
-2%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.
Outside Min %Slope
-6%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.
Outside Max %Slope
4%NumericMaximum breakover, in % slope, at the centerline.Max Breakover
0.05m and0.16ft
NumericMinimum crown deflection at the quarter points.Min Crown Deflec-tions
222 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Note that if runtime logical assignments are provided, the preceding parameters(namely default offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalProvides left edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.
AlignmentLeft Flange Point
OptionalProvides right edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.
AlignmentRight Flange Point
OptionalProvides left edge of pavement elevation valuewith respect to the attachment point.
ProfileLeft Flange Profile
OptionalProvides right edge of pavement elevationvalue with respect to the attachment point.
ProfileRight Flange Profile
RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-
SurfaceEGTopSurf
vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively.
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the left outside laneLeft Outside Lane%Slope
OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 223
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the left inside laneLeft Inside Lane %Slope
Numeric% slope of the right outside laneRight Outside Lane%Slope
Numeric% slope of the right inside laneRight Inside Lane%Slope
Behavior
This subassembly uses an iterative process to develop acceptable slopes of theinside and outside links. The initial slopes are set as described below. Eachtime the slope of one link is adjusted, resulting changes in the adjacent linksmay put them out of design tolerances. If a solution is not obtained within10 iterations, a message is displayed and the process is aborted.
Left Edge of Pavement
From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through the "Left Flange Point"logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned markedpoint (to Left Flange Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it isbased on the default (Left Flange Offset) offset value.
Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) the Left Flangeprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then the surface elevationis determined from the "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment , or (c) if both of theseare not provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation.An error message results if none of these two conditions are met and thecorridor fails to build.
Right Edge of Pavement
From the attachment point, the right edge of pavement point is located basedon: (a) location of alignment through "Right Flange Point" logical assignment,(b) if previous is not provided, based on the assigned marked point (to RightFlange Point), or (c) if both are not provided based on the default (Right FlangeOffset) offset value.
Similarly, elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Flangeprofile logical assignment, or (b) if previous is not provided then finding outthe surface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if the
224 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
previous two are not provided, the assigned marked point determines theelevation. An error message results if none of these two conditions are metand the corridor fails to build.
Crown Point
The Crown Point (offset) is located at halfway between the left edge and rightedge of pavements.
Elevation of the crown point is the sum of "average elevation of left and rightedges" and the "crown height" parameter value.
Bottom of Overlay
Bottom of overlay surface is computed by offsetting the proposed finish grade(Left Edge point to New Crown Point to Right Edge Point) by Overlay depthvalue.
Quarter Points and Crown Point Offsets
The distance between left and right flange points is divided by four to get thetwo quarter points and the crown point. These points elevations are computedby adding the minimum overlay depth to the existing ground at these offsets.
Inside and Outside Pavement Slopes
The resulting overlay links from the previous steps are checked for being withinthe slope tolerances for the outside and inside lanes. If the slopes are withinthe tolerence, then the case is a simple overlay as shown in the followingdiagram.
If overlay links are too steep, or if the Maximum Breakover is exceeded at thecenterline, or the Min Crown Deflection is not obtained, some or all links areflattened to their maximum slopes. Milling surfaces are inserted to hold theminimum overlay depths at the quarter points and centerline.
If overlay links are too shallow, the depth of overlay is increased to achievethe minimum slopes. If this results in too much breakover, further adjustmentsand milling may occur. The following diagram explains overlay with millingcase:
OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges | 225
Special Cases
A positive slope may be allowed on one inside link if the other inside link hasa negative slope, as shown below.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly inserts two lanes at either side of theattachment point. First two edge points will be located based on left/rightoffsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated (in layout mode)by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the"Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, sincethe programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default thecrown point matches with attachment point. Lane slopes in layout mode areequal to the "Min % Outside/Inside Slope" value. Thickness of pavement isequal to Minimum Overlay depth.
226 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P5
Edges of lane on OverlayETW_OverlayP6, P10
Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP3
Crown (grade break) on OverlayCrown_OverlayP8
Grade break point at quarter pointsLaneBreakP2. P4
Grade break point at quarter points on overlaysurface
LaneBreak_OverlayP7, P9
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2, L3, L4
Overlay surfaceOverlayL5, L6, L7, L8
Overlay areaOverlayS1
Coding Diagram
OverlayBrokenBackOverGuttersThis subassembly is used to overlay a four-lane crowned corridor over gutters(between flow lines) on each side, holding to required slope and breakoverranges. This subassembly differs from OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges because
OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 227
it overlays existing gutters to a known profile on the curb face, rather thanoverlaying between known flange points.
To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right curb face points. Elevations at these points could come fromsurfaces or profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (forexample, curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could bepassed in as marked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.
Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. Since thesubassembly places lanes on either side of the crown, this attachment pointis typically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finished grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be same as crown point, since crownpoint offset and elevation are computed by input data such as left and right(Curb face) offset values.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
6m and18ft
NumericDistance between attachment point and the leftgutter’s curb face. This value is used only if no
Left Gutter Offset
alignment or marked point is associated to leftedge.
6m and18ft
NumericDistance between attachment point and the rightgutter’s curb face. This value is used only if no
Right Gutter Offset
alignment or marked point is associated to rightedge.
228 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringProvides existing left edge of pavement offset andelevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL)
Left Gutter – MarkedPoint
NoneStringProvides existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTION-AL)
Right Gutter –Marked Point
0.1m and0.33ft
NumericMinimum depth of overlay at the quarter pointsand crown.
Minimum Overlay
-1%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.
Inside Min %Slope
-4%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the inside lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.
Inside Max %Slope
-2%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.
Outside Min %Slope
-6%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.
Outside Max %Slope
4%NumericMaximum breakover, in % slope, at the centerline.Max Breakover
0.05mand 0.16ft
NumericMinimum crown deflection at the quarter points.Min Crown Deflec-tions
If runtime logical assignments are provided, the parameters above (namelydefault offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.
OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 229
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalProvides left edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.
AlignmentLeft Gutter Point
OptionalProvides right edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.
AlignmentRight Gutter Point
OptionalProvides left edge of pavement elevation valuewith respect to the attachment point.
ProfileLeft Gutter Profile
OptionalProvides right edge of pavement elevationvalue with respect to the attachment point.
ProfileRight Gutter Profile
RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-
SurfaceEGTopSurf
vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively.
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the left outside laneLeft Outside Lane%Slope
Numeric% slope of the left inside laneLeft Inside Lane %Slope
Numeric% slope of the right outside laneRight Outside Lane%Slope
Numeric% slope of the right inside laneRight Inside Lane%Slope
230 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Behavior
This subassembly uses an iterative pocess to develop acceptable slopes of theinside and outside links. The initial slopes are set as described below. Eachtime the slope of one link is adjusted, resulting changes in the adjacent linksmay put them out of design tolerances. If a solution is not obtained within10 iterations, a message is displayed and the process is aborted.
Left Edge of Pavement
From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Left Gutter Point" logicalassignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it is based on the assigned markedpoint (to Left Gutter Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, it is basedon the default (Left Gutter Offset) offset value.
Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Left Gutterprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation. Anerror messageresults if none of these two conditions are met and the corridorfails to build.
Right Edge of Pavement
From the attachment point, the right edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Right Gutter Point" logicalassignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned marked point(to Right Gutter Point), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it is basedon the default (Right Gutter Offset) offset value.
Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Gutterprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, then the marked point determines the elevation. An errormessage results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor failsto build.
Quarter Points and Crown Point Offsets
The distance between left and right flange points is divided by four to get thetwo quarter points and the crown point. These points elevations are computedby adding the minimum overlay depth to the existing ground at these offsets.
Inside and Outside Pavement Slopes
The resulting overlay links from the previous steps are checked for being withinthe slope tolerances for the outside and inside lanes. If the slopes are within
OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 231
the tolerance, then the case is a simple overlay as show in the followingdiagram.
If the overlay links are too steep, or if the Maximum Breakover is exceeded atthe centerline, or the Min Crown Deflection is not obtained, some or all linksare flattened to their maximum slopes. Milling surfaces are inserted to holdthe minimum overlay depths at the quarter points and centerline.
If overlay links are too shallow, the depth of overlay is increased to achievethe minimum slopes. If this results in too much breakover, further adjustmentsand milling may occur. The following diagram illustrates the overlay withmilling case.
Special Cases
A positive slope may be allowed on one inside link if the other inside link hasa negative slope, as shown below.
232 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly inserts two lanes at either side of theattachment point. The firts two edge points will be located based on left/rightoffsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated, in layout mode,by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the"Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, sincethe programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default, thecrown point matches the attachment point. Lane slopes in layout mode areequal to the "Min % Outside/Inside Slope" value. Thickness of pavement isequal to Minimum Overlay depth.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P5
Edges of lane on OverlayETW_OverlayP6, P10
Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP3
Crown (grade break) on OverlayCrown_OverlayP8
Grade break point at quarter pointsLaneBreakP2. P4
Grade break point at quarter points on overlaysurface
LaneBreak_OverlayP7, P9
OverlayBrokenBackOverGutters | 233
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2, L3, L4
Overlay surfaceOverlayL5, L6, L7, L8
Overlay areaOverlayS1
Coding Diagram
OverlayCrownBetweenEdgesCreates a simple crowned roadway between two edge-of-pavement points.
To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right edges. Elevations at these points could come from surfaces orprofiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example, curband gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in as markedpoints, thus transferring offset and elevation information.
234 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. This istypically at the assembly baseline point. While in layout mode, this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finshed grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be the same as crown point sinceits offset and elevation are computed by edge of pavement data.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
3.6m and12ft
NumericDistance between default attachment point to leftedge of pavement. This value is used only if no
Left Edge Offset
alignment or marked point is associated to leftedge.
3.6m and12ft
NumericDistance between default attachment point to rightedge of pavement. This value is used only if no
Right Edge Offset
OverlayCrownBetweenEdges | 235
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
alignment or marked point is associated to rightedge.
NoneStringProvides existing left edge of pavement offset andelevation to start the subassembly. (OPTIONAL)
Left Edge – MarkedPoint
NoneStringProvides existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly. (OPTION-AL)
Right Edge – MarkedPoint
0.1m and0.33ft
NumericHeight from the center point of the string line tothe crown point.
Crown Height
-1%NumericMinimum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.
Min %Slope
-3%NumericMaximum % slope allowed for the outside lanes,in the outward direction from the attachmentpoint.
Max %Slope
0.1m and0.30ft
NumericDepth of overlay above existing finish grades.Overlay Depth
If runtime logical assignments are provided, the preceding parameters (namelydefault offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalProvides left edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.
AlignmentLeft Edge
OptionalProvides right edge of pavement offset valuewith respect to the attachment point.
AlignmentRight Edge
236 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalProvides left edge of pavement elevation valuewith respect to the attachment point.
ProfileLeft Edge
OptionalProvides right edge of pavement elevationvalue with respect to the attachment point.
ProfileRight Edge
RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-
SurfaceEGTopSurf
vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively.
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric% slope of the left laneLeft Lane %Slope
Numeric% slope of the right laneRight Lane %Slope
Behavior
Left Edge of Pavement
From the attachment point, the left edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Left Edge" logicalassignment, (b) if this is not provided, it is based on the assigned marked point(to Left Edge), or (c) if both of these are not provided, then it is based on thedefault (Left Edge) offset value.
Similarly, the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Left Edgeprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, the assigned marked pointdetermines the elevation. An errormessage results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridor failsto build.
Right Edge of Pavement
From the attachment point, the right edge of the pavement point is locatedbased on: (a) the location of the alignment through "Right Edge" logical
OverlayCrownBetweenEdges | 237
assignment, (b) if previous is not provided, based on the assigned markedpoint (to Right Edge), or (c) if both are not provided based on the default(Right Edge) offset value.
Similarly , the elevation for this point is computed based on: (a) Right Edgeprofile logical assignment, (b) if this is not provided, then it determines thesurface elevation from "EGTopSurf" Logical assignment, or (c) if these two arenot provided, then the assigned marked point determines the elevation. Anerror message results if none of these two conditions are met and the corridorfails to build.
Crown Point
Crown Point (offset) is located at halfway between the left edge and right edgeof pavements.
Elevation of the crown point is the sum of "average elevation of left and rightedges" and the "crown height" parameter value.
Bottom of Overlay
Bottom of overlay surface is computed by offsetting the proposed finish grade(Left Edge point to New Crown Point to Right Edge Point) by Overlay depthvalue.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly inserts one lane each on either side of theattachment point. First two edge points will be located based on left/rightoffsets. These left and right point elevations are calculated (in layout mode)by subtracting crown height from the ordinate of attachment point. Then the"Crown Point" is located halfway between these two points. However, sincethe programatic defaults are the same for both left and right, by default thecrown point matches with baseline marker point. Lane slopes in layout modeare equal to the "Min % Slope" value. Thickness of pavement is equal to Overlaydepth.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3
Edges of lane on OverlayETW_OverlayP4, P6
238 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Crown (grade break) on finish gradeCrownP2
Crown (grade break) on OverlayCrown_OverlayP5
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L2
Overlay surfaceOverlayL3, L4
Overlay areaOverlayS1, S2
Coding Diagram
OverlayMedianAsymmetricalWidens an existing divided highway by extending from the travel lane edgesinward over a depressed median, with an asymmetrical barrier at the centerlineto resolve elevation differences. It includes an option to tie the top-of-barrierelevation to a predefined profile.
OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 239
Attachment
The attachment point is the center of the base of the barrier.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.100 mNumeric, posi-tive
Thickness of the median overlay layers.Overlay Depth0.3 ft
240 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the left side.
Left Insert Off-set
0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.
Left Inside Sam-ple Offset
0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.
Left OutsideSample Offset
0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the right side.
Right Insert Off-set
0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the right side.The slope of the right side is calculated on theexisting surface between the sample points.
Right InsideSample Offset
0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the rightside. The slope of the right side is calculated onthe existing surface between the sample points.
Right OutsideSample Offset
810 mmNumeric, posi-tive
Height of the barrier from the base on the highside of the median to the top of the barrier.
Dimension A(mm or inches) 32 in
232Numeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension B(mm or inches) 9 in
59 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension C(mm or inches) 2 in
125 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension D(mm or inches) 5 in
557 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension E(mm or inches) 22 in
OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 241
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
178 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension F(mm or inches) 7 in
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway.
SurfaceExisting Surface
OptionalMay be used to tie the top ofbarrier to the elevation of a
ProfileTop of Barrier
profile. Dimension E may varyto achieve the calculated barrierheight.
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left insert pointfrom an alignment.
AlignmentLeft Insert Offset
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left inside samplepoint from an alignment.
AlignmentLeft Inside Sample Offset
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left outside samplepoint from an alignment.
AlignmentLeft Outside SampleOffset
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right insert pointfrom an alignment.
AlignmentRight Insert Offset
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right inside samplepoint from an alignment.
AlignmentRight Inside Sample Off-set
242 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right outside sam-ple point from an alignment.
AlignmentRight Outside SampleOffset
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The left and right slopes are calculated between the sample points on eachside. Lines from the cutout points are extended inward at these slopes to thecenterline. The side with the highest elevation at the centerline determinesthe controlling side for the minimum height of the barrier.
The offset of the barrier base on the high side is calculated from the givendimensions. The overlay layer on the high side is extended from the cutoutpoint to this offset.
The overlay layer on the low side is extended from the cutout point to theoffset of the barrier base on the high side.
The barrier is constructed from the base point on the high side, closing to thetop of the overlay layer on the low side, as shown in the diagram.
If a top-of-barrier profile is given as a runtime logical assignment, the heightof the barrier is controlled by the profile. Dimension E may vary to achievethis height.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, a symmetrical median and barrier are drawn with the fixeddimensions shown below. This is the same figure that is drawn in layout modefor the OverlayMedianSymmetrical subassembly.
OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 243
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Beginning of median extension at top of overlayETWP1, P5
Beginning of median extension at bottom of over-lay
ETW_OverlayP3, P7
BarrierAll barrier points
Exposed top of overlay layersTopL1, L5
OverlayL2 - L4
OverlayL7 - L9
BarrierAll barrier links
OverlayS1, S2
BarrierS3
244 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
NOTE The mirror image will apply when the high side of the median is on theright instead of the left.
OverlayMedianAsymmetrical | 245
OverlayMedianSymmetricalWidens an existing divided highway by extending from the travel lane edgesinward over a depressed median, with a symmetrical barrier at the centerline.The median slopes may vary somewhat from the existing slopes to make bothsides meet at the centerline, or to hold the top of the barrier to a profile.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the midpoint of the base of the barrier.
246 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.100 mNumeric, posi-tive
Thickness of the median overlay layers.Overlay Depth0.3 ft
5%Numeric, posi-tive
Amount that the median % slopes are allowed tovary from the calculated existing Left and Rightslopes.
Slope Tolerance
0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the left side.
Left Insert Off-set
0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.
Left Inside Sam-ple Offset
0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the left side.The slope of the left side is calculated on the exist-ing surface between the sample points.
Left OutsideSample Offset
0.0NumericOffset where the median extension layer beginson the right side.
Right Insert Off-set
0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point on the right side.The slope of the right side is calculated on theexisting surface between the sample points.
Right InsideSample Offset
0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point on the rightside. The slope of the right side is calculated onthe existing surface between the sample points.
Right OutsideSample Offset
810 mmNumeric, posi-tive
Height of the barrier from the base on the highside of the median to the top of the barrier.
Dimension A(mm or inches) 32 in
OverlayMedianSymmetrical | 247
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
232Numeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension B(mm or inches) 9 in
59 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension C(mm or inches) 2 in
125 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension D(mm or inches) 5 in
557 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension E(mm or inches) 22 in
178 mmNumeric, posi-tive
As shown in diagram.Dimension F(mm or inches) 7 in
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway.
SurfaceExisting Surface
OptionalMay be used to tie the top ofbarrier to the elevation of a
ProfileTop of Barrier
profile. Dimension E may varyto achieve the calculated barrierheight.
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left insert pointfrom an alignment.
AlignmentLeft Insert Offset
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left inside samplepoint from an alignment.
AlignmentLeft Inside Sample Offset
248 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the left outside samplepoint from an alignment.
AlignmentLeft Outside SampleOffset
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right insert pointfrom an alignment.
AlignmentRight Insert Offset
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right inside samplepoint from an alignment.
AlignmentRight Inside Sample Off-set
OptionalMay be used to calculate theoffset of the right outside sam-ple point from an alignment.
AlignmentRight Outside SampleOffset
Behavior
The left and right slopes are calculated between the sample points on eachside.
If the Top of Barrier Profile is not given:
■ On each side, a line is calculated that extends from the cutout points tothe centerline using the slopes calculated from the sample points.
■ If the two lines do not meet at equal elevations, the median slope on thehigher side is adjusted down to meet the lower side. The adjustment maynot exceed the Slope Tolerance.
■ If the high side was adjusted by the slope tolerance and the two sides stilldo not meet, the low side is adjusted upward. If the adjustment requiredis greater than the Slope Tolerance, the subassembly exits without storingany points, links, or shapes.
If a Top of Barrier Profile is given as a runtime logical assignment:
■ The left and right barrier base points are calculated from the profileelevation using the given barrier dimensions.
OverlayMedianSymmetrical | 249
■ The slopes between the barrier base points and the insert points arecalculated.
■ If the difference between the median slope and the existing slope is greaterthan the slope tolerance on either side, the subassembly exits withoutstoring any points, links, or shapes.
■ Otherwise, the median and barrier geometry is added, based on thecalculated barrier base point positions, with the median slopes adjustedto tie to the barrier base points.
Output Parameters
None.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, a median and barrier are drawn with the fixed dimensionsas shown in the following diagram. This is the same figure that is drawn inlayout mode for the OverlayMedianAsymmetrical subassembly.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Beginning of median extension at top of overlayETWP1, P5
250 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Beginning of median extension at bottom of overlayETW_OverlayP3, P7
BarrierAll barrier points
Exposed top of overlay layersTopL1 - L3
OverlayL4 - L8
BarrierAll barrier links
OverlayS1
BarrierS2
Coding Diagram
OverlayMillAndLevel1This subassembly adds an overlay layer on an existing uncrowned roadwayor ramp, with either a leveling and milling layer added as required.
OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 251
Attachment
The attachment point is the edge of overlay on finish grade at the inside trimpoint.
252 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericOffset of the inside sample point. The samplepoints are used to calculate the slope of the exist-ing roadway.
Inside Sample PointOffset
0.0NumericOffset of the outside sample point.Outside SamplePoint Offset
0.0NumericOffset of the inside trim point, which defines theinside edge of the overlay layer
Inside Trim Point
0.0NumericOffset of the outside trim point, which defines theoutside edge of the overlay layer
Outside Trim Point
MNumericor String
%Slope of the overlay layer. This can be specifiedwith the following options:
Overlay %Slope (val/ M / S)
Code: Superelevation TypeValue: A numeric % slope value from the inside tooutside edge.M: Match the slope from the Inside Sample Pointto the Outside Sample Point.S: Use the outside lane superelevation slope of thecorridor alignment. If the Inside Points are left ofthe Outside Points, the left side superelevation isused. Otherwise the right side isused.
0.5%Numeric,positive
The value that the Overlay Slope is allowed varyfrom its design value. The slope tolerance is not
%Slope Tolerance
used if the Overlay Slope is given as M (see Behav-ior below for details).
OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 253
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Use mini-mum clear-ance
SelectionList
Selects whether to hold the top of overlay at theinside trim point to the corridor profile elevation,or to set the vertical placement of the overlay layerbased on the Minimum Clearance value
Use Profile
0.100 mNumericThe minimum vertical clearance between the exist-ing surface and the bottom of the overlay layer. A
Minimum Clearance(+/-) 0.30 ft
positive value places the bottom-of-overlay linkabove the existing surface, creating a Levelinglayer beneath the overlay. A negative value placesthe bottom-of-overlay link below the existing sur-face, creating a Milling layer that coincides with aportion of the Overlay layer.
0.100 mNumeric,positive
The thickness of the overlay layerOverlay Depth0.30 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway
SurfaceExisting Surface
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Inside Sample Point Offset
AlignmentInside Sample Point Off-set
and tie the point to an offsetalignment
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Outside Sample Point Off-
AlignmentOutside Sample PointOffset
set and tie the point to an offsetalignment
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Inside Trim Point Offset
AlignmentInside Trim Point Offset
and tie the point to an offsetalignment
254 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Outside Trim Point Offset
AlignmentOutside Trim Point Off-set
and tie the point to an offsetalignment
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericThe slope used for applying the overlay layer%Slope
Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the top and bottom of anoverlay layer. The links are inserted from the Inside Trim Offset to the OutsideTrim Offset.
Overlay Slopes
The slope of the Existing Surface is determined between the inside and outsidesample points. The slope of the overlay layer is determined by the followingsteps:
1 If the Overlay %Slope input is given as M, then the overlay slope matchesthe slope from the Inside Sample Point to the Outside Sample point.
2 If the Overlay %Slope is given as S, then the overlay uses the outside lanesuperelevation slope defined for the corridor alignment. The left sideslope is used if the Outside Sample Point is to the left of the Inside SamplePoint, otherwise the right side superelevation slope is used.
3 If a numeric value is given for the Overlay %Slope, the given value isused.
4 If a numeric value or the superelevation slope is used, the overlay slopeis compared to the existing slope between the sample points. If thedifference exceeds the Slope Tolerance value, the design slope is adjustedup or down by the Tolerance value to make it more closely match theexisting slope and minimize the amount of leveling or milling. Slopeadjustment does not occur if the Slope Tolerance is zero.
OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 255
256 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Overlay Elevations
The elevations of the overlay points are determined as follows:
1 If the Use Profile value is True, the elevation of the corridor profile is heldat the Inside Trim offset on the top of overlay. The overlay is extendedat the overlay slope to the Outside Trim offset, and a parallel link isinserted for the bottom-of-overlay. Any areas above the existing surfaceand below the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code“Level”. Areas below the existing surface and above the bottom-of-overlayare stored as closed shapes with code “Mill”.
2 If the Use Profile value is False, the bottom-of-overlay link is shiftedvertically to hold to the Minimum Clearance above or below the existingsurface. A positive Minimum Clearance creates a leveling area above theexisting surface and below the bottom-of-overlay. A negative clearancecreates a milling area below the existing surface and above thebottom-of-overlay.
Minimum Clearance Point
The method of determining the point where the Minimum Clearanceappliesis shown in the diagram below.
1 A vertical projection line is established at any arbitrary offset.
OverlayMillAndLevel1 | 257
2 Each point on the Existing Surface between the two trim points isprojected back to the projection line at the Overlay Slope.
3 The point with the highest elevation on the projection line is the controlpoint for a Minimum Clearance value greater than zero. The one withthe lowest is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value less thanzero.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the overlay layer positioned fromany convenient point of attachment at a slope of -2%.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Overlay edges on finish gradeEOVP1, P2
Edges of bottom-of-overlayEOV_OverlayP3, P4
Top of overlayTop, PaveL1
Overlay links. Note that L3, L4 go from the bottom-of-overlay to top-of-overlay in both the Levelingand Milling cases
OverlayL2, L3, L4
For the Leveling caseLevelL5, L6For the Milling caseMill
258 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Area between the top and bottom of overlay. Thisoverlaps the milling area (S3) for the Milling caseas shown in the Coding Diagram below.
OverlayS1
Area above existing surface and below the bottomof overlay (Leveling case)
LevelS2
Area below the existing surface and above thebottom of overlay (Milling case). This area overlaps
MillS3
the Overlay area as shown in the Coding Diagrambelow.
Coding Diagram
OverlayMillAndLevel2This subassembly adds an overlay layer on an existing crowned roadway, witheither a leveling and milling layer added as required.
OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 259
Attachment
The attachment point is the crown point on the overlay finish grade.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericOffset of the crown point. The crown and samplepoints are used to calculate the left and right slopesof the existing roadway.
Crown Point Offset
0.0NumericOffset of the left sample pointLeft Sample PointOffset
0.0NumericOffset of the right sample pointRight Sample PointOffset
260 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericOffset of the left trim point, which defines theoutside edge of the overlay layer on the left side
Left Trim Point
0.0NumericOffset of the right trim point, which defines theoutside edge of the overlay layer on the right side
Right Trim Point
MNumericor String
%Slope of the overlay layer from the crown pointto the left trim point. This can be specified withthe following options:
Left Overlay %Slope(val / M / S)
Code: Superelevation TypeValue: A numeric % slope value from the inside tooutside edge.M: Match the slope from the Inside Sample Pointto the Outside Sample Point.S: Use the outside lane superelevation slope of thecorridor alignment.
MNumericor String
%Slope of the overlay layer from the crown pointto the right trim point. This can be specified withthe same options used for the left side.
Right Overlay%Slope(val / M / S)
0.5%Numeric,positive
The value that the Overlay Slopes are allowed varyfrom their design values. The slope tolerance is not
%Slope Tolerance
used if the Overlay Slope is given as M (see Behav-ior below for details).
Use mini-mum clear-ance
SelectionList
Selects whether to hold the top of overlay at theinside trim point to the corridor profile elevation,or to set the vertical placement of the overlay layerbased on the Minimum Clearance value
Use Profile
0.100 mNumericThe minimum vertical clearance between the exist-ing surface and the bottom of the overlay layer. A
Minimum Clearance(+/-) 0.30 ft
positive value places the bottom-of-overlay linkabove the existing surface, creating a Levelinglayer beneath the overlay. A negative value placesthe bottom-of-overlay link below the existing sur-
OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 261
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
face, creating a Milling layer that coincides with aportion of the Overlay layer.
0.100 mNumeric,positive
The thickness of the overlay layerOverlay Depth0.30 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the Surface defining the existingroadway
SurfaceExisting Surface
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed CrownPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment
AlignmentCrown Point Offset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Left SamplePoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment
AlignmentLeft Sample Point Offset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Right Sam-ple Point Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment
AlignmentRight Sample Point Off-set
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Left TrimPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment
AlignmentLeft Trim Point Offset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Right TrimPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment
AlignmentRight Trim Point Offset
262 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericThe slope used for applying the overlay layer on the leftside
Left Overlay %Slope
NumericThe slope used for applying the overlay layer on the rightside
Right Overlay %Slope
Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the top and bottom of anoverlay layer on each side that join at the crown point. The links are insertedfrom the Crown Point Offset to the Left and Right Trim Offsets.
Overlay Slopes
The slope of the Existing Surface on each side is determined betweenthe crownand sample points. The slopes of the overlay layers aredetermined by thefollowing steps:
1 If the Overlay %Slope input is given as M, then the overlay slope matchesthe slope from the Crown Point to the Sample point.
2 If the Overlay %Slope is given as S, then the overlay uses the outside lanesuperelevation slope defined for the corridor alignment.
3 If a numeric value is given for the Overlay %Slope, the given value isused.
4 If a numeric value or the superelevation slope is used, the overlay slopeis compared to the existing slope between the sample points. If thedifference exceeds the Slope Tolerance value, the design slope is adjustedup or down by the Tolerance value to make it more closely match theexisting slope and minimize the amount of leveling or milling. Slopeadjustment does not occur if the Slope Tolerance is zero.
OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 263
264 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 265
Overlay Elevations
The elevations of the overlay points are determined as follows:
1 If the Use Profile value is True, the elevation of the corridor profile is heldat the Crown Point offset on the top of overlay. The overlay is extendedto each side at the overlay slopes to the Left and Right Trim offsets, andparallel links are inserted for the bottom-of-overlay. Any areas above theexisting surface and below the bottom-of-overlay are stored as closedshapes with code “Level”. Areas below the existing surface and above thebottom-of-overlay are stored as closed shapes with code “Mill”.
2 If the Use Profile value is False, the bottom-of-overlay link on each sideis shifted vertically to hold to the Minimum Clearance above or belowthe existing surface. A positive Minimum Clearance creates a levelingarea above the existing surface and below the bottom-of-overlay. Anegative clearance creates a milling area below the existing surface andabove the bottom-of-overlay. The overlay links on one side are shiftedvertically so that the links meet at the crown point.
Minimum Clearance Point
266 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
The method of determining the point where the Minimum Clearance appliesis shown in the diagram below.
1 A vertical projection line is established at any arbitrary offset.
2 Each point on the Existing Surface between the two trim points isprojected back to the projection line at the Overlay Slope.
3 The point with the highest elevation on the projection line is the controlpoint for a Minimum Clearance value greater than zero. The one withthe lowest is the control point for a Minimum Clearance value less thanzero.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the overlay layer positioned fromany convenient point of attachment at a slope of -2%.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Crown on finish gradeCrownP1
Overlay edges on finish gradeEOVP2, P3
Crown on bottom-of-overlayCrown_OverlayP4
Edges of bottom-of-overlayEOV_OverlayP5, P6
OverlayMillAndLevel2 | 267
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Top of overlayTop, PaveL1, L2
Overlay links. Note that L5, L6 go from the bot-tom-of-overlay to top-of-overlay in both the Level-ing and Milling cases.
OverlayL3 – L6
Verticals from existing surface to bottom-of-over-lay:
LevelMill
L7, L8
Level - For the Leveling case.Mill - For the Milling case.
Area between the top and bottom of overlay. Thisoverlaps the milling area (S3) for the Milling caseas shown below.
OverlayS1
Area above existing surface and below the bottomof overlay (Leveling case)
LevelS2
Area below the existing surface and above thebottom of overlay (Milling case). This area overlapsthe Overlay area as shown below.
MillS3
268 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
OverlayParabolicThis subassembly inserts parabolic travel lanes, to represent finish grade,pavement, and subbase for urban, parabolic lanes between known flangepoints. The parabolic shape is simulated by a series of short, straight-line links.
To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theleft and right flange points. Elevations at these points could come from surfacesor profiles. Furthermore, if the component defining the edges (for example,curb and gutter) is also a rehab component, then they could be passed in asmarked points, thus transferring offset and elevation information.
OverlayParabolic | 269
Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the crown point of the subassembly. Since thesubassembly places lanes on either side of the crown, this attachment pointis typically at the assembly baseline point. While in the layout mode this pointcoincides with crown point, in the corridor state the finished grade profilepoint (or baseline marker point) may not be the same as crown point, as crownpoint offset and elevation are computed by input data such as left and right(flange point) offset values.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
7.2mNumericDistance between attachment point to left edgeof pavement. This value is used only if no align-ment or marked point is associated to left edge.
Left Flange Offset24.0ft
7.2mNumericDistance between attachment point to right edgeof pavement. This value is used only if no align-ment or marked point is associated to right edge.
Right Flange Offset24.0ft
NoneStringTo provide existing left edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly (OPTIONAL)
Left Flange – MarkedPoint
NoneStringTo provide existing right edge of pavement offsetand elevation to start the subassembly (OPTIONAL)
Right Flange –Marked Point
270 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.10mNumeric,positive
Height from the center point of the string line tothe crown of road.
Crown Height0.3333ft
-1%NumericMinimum % cross slope allowed for the lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.
Min %Slope
-4%NumericMaximum % cross slope allowed for the lanes, inthe outward direction from the attachment point.
Max %Slope
0.025mNumeric,positive
Depth of overlay below the finish grade.Overlay Depth0.083ft
8Numeric,positive,even
Number of straight line increments simulating theparabolic shape
No. Increments
If runtime logical assignments are provided, the parameters above (namelydefault offsets and marked points) will be ignored as applicable.
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalThis will provide left edge of pavement offsetvalue with respect to the attachment point
AlignmentLeft Gutter Point
OptionalThis will provide right edge of pavement offsetvalue with respect to the attachment point
AlignmentRight Gutter Point
OptionalThis will provide left edge of pavement eleva-tion value with respect to the attachmentpoint
ProfileLeft Gutter Profile
OptionalThis will provide right edge of pavement ele-vation value with respect to the attachmentpoint
ProfileRight Gutter Profile
OverlayParabolic | 271
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-
SurfaceEGTopSurf
vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value (for left/right) respectively
Output Parameters
None
Behavior
Initial attachment point is just a place holder (and more applicable in layoutmode). First two points to establish are left and right edges, whose offsets andelevations are determined based on input parameters.
Then a string line is defined by joining the left and right flange points (whichare newly established edges of travelways). This string line is divided by"number of increments" parameter and middle one is taken as "crown point"offset. Crown point elevation is established by adding the 'crown height"parameter to the elevation of midpoint on the string line.
The ordinates of the parabolic curve at other tesselated points are calculatedusing standard vertical curve equations, based on the assumption that thestring line is horizontal. Straight line links are added to connect the ordinatepoints in a series (from left edge to crown point to right edge) to define thefinish grade. A parallel surface is inserted at the overlay depth below this finishgrade.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly inserts equal number (based on inputparameter) lanes on either side of the attachment point. First two edge pointswill be located based on left/right offsets. These left and right point elevationsare calculated (in layout mode) by subtracting crown height from the ordinateof attachment point. Then the "Crown Point" is located halfway between thesetwo points. However, since the programatic defaults are the same for both leftand right, by default the crown point matches with attachment point. Laneslopes are accepted as they come in. Thickness of pavement is equal to overlaydepth.
272 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Outside edges of lane on finish gradeETWP1, P3
Outside edges of lane on the Base surfaceETW_OverlayP4, P6
Crown point on finish gradeCrownP2
Crown point on Pave1Crown_OverlayP5
Links connecting all points on finish gradeTop, PaveL1 to Ln
Links connecting all points on bottom of overlaysurface
OverlayL(n+1) to L(2n)
Area between finish grade and Pave1OverlayS1
Coding Diagram
OverlayWidenMatchSlope1This subassembly overlays one side of an existing road, and adds one or moretravel lanes to the edge while matching the existing lane slopes.
OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 273
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the top of the overlay layer.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericOffset of the sample point, which may be anywherebetween the insertion point and the next slope
Sample Point Off-set
break on the existing road surface. Typical Samplepoint locations are the crown of road, or the oppo-site edge-of-traveled-way if the road is not crowned.
0.0NumericOffset of the insertion point, which is typically atthe edge-of-traveled-way where the widening is tooccur
Insert Point Offset
274 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth of the overlay above the existing finish gradeOverlay Depth0.30 ft
3.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the widening laneWidth12.0 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the Pave1 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the Pave2 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the base layer for the lane wideningBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the subbase layer for the lane wideningSubbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the Surface defining the existingroadway
SurfaceExisting Surface
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed SamplePoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment
AlignmentSample Point Offset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed InsertPoint Offset and tie the point to an offsetalignment
AlignmentInsert Point Offset
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed widen-ing lane Width and tie the edge-of-lane toan offset alignment
AlignmentWidth
OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 275
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericThe calculated slope on the existing surface from the SamplePoint to the Insert Point
%Slope
Behavior
The elevations of the Sample Point and Insert Point on the Existing Surfaceare determined, and the slope is calculated from the sample point to the insertpoint. An overlay layer is added above the existing lane at the same slope forthe given Overlay Depth. A closed overlay shape is created by superimposingone or more links over the existing grade.The widening lane is attachedoutward from the overlay at the Insert Offset using the calculated slope.
The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single vertticallink is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly is attached to any convenient point. Theoverlay layer is shown at a uniform depth for a width of 3.6 meters or 12 ftat a slope of -2%. The widening lane extends from the edge-of-overlay for thegiven width and depths at a -2% slope.
In modeling mode the shapes adjust to the actual conditions determined bythe Sample Point, Insert Point, and Existing Surface.
276 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Outside edge of widening lane on finish gradeETWP5
Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P7
Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P9
Outside edge of widening lane on BaseETW_BaseP11
Outside edge of widening lane on SubbaseETW_SubP13
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L5
Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface.Note that there may be more than a single linkbetween points P3 and P4.
OverlayL2
Pave1L6
Pave2L7
BaseL8
Subbase, DatumL9
DatumL10
Area between the overlay and existing laneOverlayS1
Pave1S2
Pave2S3
BaseS4
OverlayWidenMatchSlope1 | 277
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
SubbaseS5
Coding Diagram
OverlayWidenMatchSlope2This subassembly overlays an existing uncrowned road, and adds one or moretravel lanes to the left and right edges while matching the existing lane slope.
278 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edges of the finish grade on the wideninglanes.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericOffset of the Left Insert Point. This is the point wherethe widening lane on the left begins, and is typicallyat the existing left edge-of-traveled-way.
Left Insert PointOffset
0.0NumericOffset of the Right Insert Point, typically at the exist-ing right edge-of-traveled way
Right Insert PointOffset
OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 279
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth of the overlay above the existing finish gradeOverlay Depth0.30 ft
3.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the left widening laneLeft Width12.0 ft
3.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the right widening laneRight Width12.0 ft
0.025mNumeric,positive
Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric,positive
Depth between the subbase and the top of the baselayer
Subbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway
SurfaceExisting Surface
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Insert Point Offset and
AlignmentLeft Insert Point Offset
tie the point to an offset align-ment
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Right Insert Point Offset
AlignmentRight Insert Point Offset
and tie the point to an offsetalignment
280 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Left Width and tie the
AlignmentLeft Width
edge-of-lane to an offset align-ment
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Right Width and tie the
AlignmentRight Width
edge-of-lane to an offset align-ment
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericThe calculated slope on the existing surface from theSample Point to the Insert Point
%Slope
Behavior
The elevations of the Left and Right Insert Points on the Existing Surface aredetermined, and the slope is calculated between the two points. If a non-zeroOverlay Depth is given, an overlay layer is added above the existing lane atthe calculated slope. A closed overlay shape is created by superimposing oneor more links over the existing grade. The widening lanes are inserted outwardfrom the overlay edges for the given widths at calculated slope.
If the Overlay Depth is given as zero, the widening lanes are inserted outwardfrom the insert offsets at the existing grade.
The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single vertticallink is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly is attached to any convenient point. Theoverlay layer is shown at a uniform depth for a width of 4.2 meters or 14 feetat a slope of -2%. The widening lanes extend from the edges-of-overlay at thegiven widths and depths at the -2% slope.
OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 281
In modeling mode the subassembly adjusts to the positions and slopesdetermined by the Insert Points and the Existing Surface.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Outside edge of widening lane on finish gradeETWP5
Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P7
Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P9
Outside edge of widening lane on BaseETW_BaseP11
Outside edge of widening lane on SubbaseETW_SubP13
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L5
Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface.Note that there may be more than a single linkbetween points P3 and P4.
OverlayL2
282 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Pave1L6
Pave2L7
BaseL8
Subbase, DatumL9
DatumL10
Area between the overlay and existing laneOverlayS1
Pave1S2
Pave2S3
BaseS4
SubbaseS5
OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 | 283
Coding Diagram
OverlayWidenWithSuper1This subassembly overlays one side of an existing road, and adds one or moretravel lanes to the edge using the superelevation slope defined for the outsidetravel lane.
284 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the top of the overlay layer ifthe Overlay Depth is non-zero, or at the inside edge on finish grade of thewidening lane if the Overlay Depth is zero.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.0NumericOffset of the control point, which defines the begin-ning of the pavement overlay layer
Control Point Offset
0.0NumericOffset of the insertion point of the widening lane,which is typically at the existing edge-of-traveled-way
Insert Point Offset
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth of the overlay above the existing finish gradeat the control point.
Overlay Depth0.30 ft
OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 285
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
3.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the widening laneWidth12.0 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the Pave1 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit
Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the Pave2 layer for the lane widening;zero to omit
Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the base layer for the lane wideningBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumeric,positive
Thickness of the subbase layer for the lane wideningSubbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the Surface definingthe existing roadway
SurfaceExisting Surface
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Control Point Offset and
AlignmentControl Point Offset
tie the point to an offset align-ment
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed Insert Point Offset and tiethe point to an offset alignment
AlignmentInsert Point Offset
OptionalMay be used to override thefixed widening lane Width and
AlignmentWidth
tie the edge-of-lane to an offsetalignment
286 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericThe calculated slope on the existing surface from the SamplePoint to the Insert Point
%Slope
Behavior
The outside lane superelevation is obtained from the alignment properties ofthe current control alignment, and the elevation on the Existing Surface atthe Control Point Offset is determined.
If a non-zero Overlay Depth is given, the overlay depth is applied at the controlpoint. The top of the overlay layer extends to the Insert Point Offset at thesuperelevation slope, and the overlay shape is closed by superimposing linksover the Existing Surface between the control and insert points and addingvertical links at each end. The widening lane is extended outward at thesuperelevation slope for the given Width from the edge of the overlay surface.
If the Overlay Depth is zero, the widening lane extends outward from theInsert Point Offset on the Existing Surface at the superelevation slope for thegiven Width.
The pavement layers are closed with vertical links at each end. A single vertticallink is also placed from the inside edge of Subbase to the existing surface.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly may be attached to any convenient point.The overlay layer is shown at a uniform depth, with a width of 3.6 meters or12 feet and extended at a slope of -2%. If the Overlay Depth is zero, the overlayis shown as a single link. The widening lane extends from the edge-of-overlayat a slope of -2%.
When used in corridor modeling mode, the shapes adjust to the selectedcontrol point, insert point, superelevation slope, and existing surface.
OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 287
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Outside edge of widening lane on finish gradeETWP5
Outside edge of widening lane on Pave1ETW_Pave1P7
Outside edge of widening lane on Pave2ETW_Pave2P9
Outside edge of widening lane on BaseETW_BaseP11
Outside edge of widening lane on SubbaseETW_SubP13
Finish grade surfaceTop, PaveL1, L5
Superimposed over links on the Existing Surface.Note that there may be more than a single linkbetween points P3 and P4.
OverlayL2
Pave1L6
288 | Chapter 2 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Pave2L7
BaseL8
Subbase, DatumL9
DatumL10
Area between the overlay and existing lane.OverlayS1
Pave1S2
Pave2S3
BaseS4
SubbaseS5
Coding Diagram
OverlayWidenWithSuper1 | 289
Subassembly Reference(continued)
In this chapter
■ RailSingle
■ RetainWallTapered
■ RetainWallTaperedWide
■ RetainWallTieToDitch
■ RetainWallToLowSide
■ RetainWallVertical
■ ShapeTrapezoidal
■ ShoulderExtendAll
■ ShoulderExtendSubbase
■ ShoulderVerticalSubbase
■ SideDitch
■ SideDitchUShape
■ SideDitchWithLid
■ SnapToMarkedPoint
■ StrippingPavement
■ StrippingTopSoil
■ TrenchWithPipe
■ TrenchPipe1
■ UrbanCurbGutterGeneral
3
291
■ UrbanCurbGutterValley1
■ UrbanCurbGutterValley2
■ UrbanCurbGutterValley3
■ UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1
■ UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2
■ UrbanReplaceSidewalk
■ UrbanSidewalk
292 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
RailSingleThis subassembly inserts the rails, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast for asingle-track railroad.
It should be followed with a Daylight subassembly on the left and right sidesto close to existing ground in cut and fill situations.
NOTE This subassembly is designed for visualization and to demonstrate the useof corridor modeling for rail applications. It is not intended for actual engineeringproduction work.
Attachment
The attachment point is at a distance equal to the rail height above thecenterline of the sleeper.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0 (%)Numeric% slope of the roadbedRail % Slope
1.435 mNumeric,positive
Width of the rail gauge from inside-to-in-side rail. The rails are placed symetricallyabout the centerline alignment.
Gauge Width4.7083 ft (4’ 8-1/2”)
RailSingle | 293
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2.4 mNumeric,positive
Width of the sleeper, placed symetricallyabout the centerline
Sleeper Width8.0 ft
0.200 mNumeric,positive
Height of the sleeperSleeper Height0.67 ft
3.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the top of the ballast layer, placedsymetrically about the centerline
Ballast Width12.0 ft
0.3Numeric,positive
Thickness of the ballast layer from finishgrade
Ballast Depth1.0 ft
2 (: 1)Numeric,positive
Side slope (x : 1) of the ballast layerBallast Side Slope
6.6 mNumeric,positive
Width of the top of the sub-ballast layer,placed symetrically about the centerline
Sub-ballast Width22.0 ft
0.3Numeric,positive
Thickness of the sub-ballast layerSub-ballast Depth1.0 ft
2 (: 1)Numeric,positive
Side slope of the sub-ballast layerSub-ballast SideSlope
Runtime Logical Assignments (optional)
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The links for the rails, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast are calculated and placedbased on the input parameter values provided. If the Rail %Slope is non-zero,the corridor profile elevation is held at the center of the rail on the low side.
294 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
The finish grade, sleeper, ballast, and sub-ballast links are maintained at theRail %Slope.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the finishgrade, ballast, sub-ballast, and side slopes.
Constants
DescriptionConstantPoint, Link, orShape
Edge of ballast shoulderEBSP1, P4
Edge of sleeperESLP2, P3
Daylight point for the ballast layerDaylight_BallastP8,P9
Edge of subballast shoulderESBSP7, P10
RailSingle | 295
DescriptionConstantPoint, Link, orShape
Daylight point for the sub-ballast layerDaylight_SubballastP11, P12
Numbered sequentially for longitudinal connection(not shown in diagram)
R1, R2, ..…All rail points
Finish grade on ballast layerTop, BallastL1, L3
Finish grade on top-of-sleeperTop, SleeperL2
Sides of sleeperSleeperL4, L6
Sideslopes on ballast layer (side slopes)Top, BallastL7, L8
Bottom of ballastBallastL10
Finish grade on subballast layerTop, SubballastL9, L11, L12,L14
Bottom of subballastSubballastL13
SleeperS1
BallastS2
SubballastS3
Not shown in diagramRailRail shapes
296 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
RetainWallTaperedThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one tapered side andan optional key at the bottom.
RetainWallTapered | 297
298 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is incut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near the top of theretaining wall. If it is inserted in cut condition, the attachment point is nearthe footing.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side thesubassembly is inserted to-wards.
Side
0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of thewall at the top
Wall Top Width0.292 m
The distance between thetop-of-the wall and the
Top Height
hook in fill or the new hookin cut.
The depth of cover from thetop-of-footing to the finish
Footing Cover
grade line on the back sideof the wall in fill or to thehook when in cut.
YesBooleanSpecies to add an optionalkey below the footing
Key
Wall height is determined from the top of the footing to the insertion pointof the ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall batteredslope, width of the footing, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions,and the location of the key center, are all functions of the wall height.
RetainWallTapered | 299
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wall heightand tie to a profile.
ProfileWall Height
RequiredExisting ground surface name to determineretaining wall in cut or fill.
SurfaceTarget Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachmentpoint is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of thewall, at a distance of Top Height below the top of the wall. In cut, theattachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the insideface, at a distance of Footing Cover above the top-of-footing. The wall heightis determined from the Wall Height or Profile input.
In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In cut, thesloping wall face is away from the roadway. If the Key option is set to No,then the base of the footing is a single horizontal link. If the Key option isused, links to define the optional Key are inserted.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
RW_FrontP1
RW_TopP2
300 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
RW_BackP3
RW_HingeP14
Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface
RW_InsideP12
Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface
RW_OutsideP5
Top, WallL1, L2, L3
L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;DatumL4,L5,L6
RWallS1
Coding Diagram
Fill Condition
Cut Condition
RetainWallTapered | 301
RetainWallTaperedWideThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one side tapered, andis typically used if walls are 5.5 meters or higher.
302 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
This subassembly also adds an optional key at the bottom.
Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is in acut or fill condition. If it is in a fill condition, the attachment point is nearthe top of the retaining wall. In a cut condition, the attachment point is nearthe footing.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassembly is in-serted towards.
Side
1.476 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall at the topWall Top Width0.450 m
RetainWallTaperedWide | 303
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
the distance between the top-of-the walland the hook in fill or the new hook in cut.
Top Height
The depth of cover from the top-of-footingto the finish grade line on the back side ofthe wall in fill or to the hook when in cut.
Footing Cover
YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional key below thefooting
Key
Wall height is determined from the top of the footing to the attachment pointof ground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Width and depthof the footing are measured as a function of the wall height. Wall vertical faceis located at ¼ of the footing width, and the bottom of battered slope is at300 mm from the other edge. Optional key is locate right at the center of thefooting at 300mm deep and 600mm wide.
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wallheight and tie to a profile. Assignedprofile corresponds to
ProfileWall Height
RequiredExisting ground surface name to deter-mine retaining wall in cut or fill.
SurfaceTarget Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachmentpoint is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of thewall, at a distance below the top of the wall equal to the Top Height parameter.
304 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
In a cut condition, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finishgrade intersects the inside face, above the top-of-footing at a distance equalto the Footing Cover parameter. The wall height is determined from the WallHeight or Profile input.
In a fill condition, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway.In a cut condition, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway, towardthe earth being retained. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of thefooting is a single horizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to definethe optional key are created.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
RW_FrontP1
RW_TopP2
RW_BackP3
RW_HingeP14
Could be used as breaklines in build-ing datum surface
RW_InsideP12
Could be used as breaklines in build-ing datum surface
RW_OutsideP5
L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3to P14;
Top, WallL1, L2, L3
L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10to 11;
DatumL4,L5,L6
RetainWallTaperedWide | 305
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
RWallS1
Coding Diagram
Fill Condition
Cut Condition
306 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
RetainWallTieToDitchThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with a paved shoulder andwith special tie slopes to tie to an existing ditch.
This subassembly can place an optional barrier on the top of the wall and anoptional key below the footing.
Attachment
The attachment point is on the inside of the shoulder.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassem-bly is inserted towards.
Side
RetainWallTieToDitch | 307
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric, PositiveWidth of the shoulder from the at-tachment point
Shoulder Width
Numeric, PositiveDepth of Pave 1, Enter ZERO if noPave 1
Pave 1 Depth
Numeric, PositiveDepth of Pave 2, Enter ZERO if noPave 2
Pave 2 Depth
Depth of base layerBase Depth
Depth of the subgrade layerSubgrade Depth
0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall.Wall Width0.292 m
The depth of cover from the top-of-footing to the finish grade line
Footing Cover
on the back side of the wall in fillor to the hook when in cut.
YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional key be-low the footing
Key
YesString, (a) Yes, (b) NoSpecifies to use a barrier on the topof the wall
Use Barrier
Numeric, PositiveWidth of the walkway link on thetie slope
Walk Width
NumericSlope of the walkway link(grade/slope type)
Walk Slope
NumericSlope of the fill link from the walk-way to the tie point (Slope type)
Fill Slope
308 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric, PositiveWidth from ditch point to the tiepoint (to existing inside edge ofthe ditch)
Toe Width
Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point ofground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall battered slope,width of the footing, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions, andthe location of the key center are all functions of the wall height.
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the shoul-der slope by tieing to a profile.
ProfileEdge of Shoulder
RequiredInside edge of ditch profile used tolocate Tie Point
AlignmentDitch Offset
RequiredExisting ground surface to tie in withrespect to specified ditch and toewidth
SurfaceTie-in Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted either on the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is assumed to be at the design edge-of-travel-way, fromwhere the paved shoulders will be drawn as specified by this subassembly.
The top-of-footing elevation is determined by working inwards from the TiePoint to the inside edge of walkway, then subtracting the Footing Cover fromthe tie link at the offset of the outside footing corner. The height of wall (H)is calculated between the Outside Edge of the Shoulder and the top of footing.If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontallink. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are inserted.
RetainWallTieToDitch | 309
Note: A very small gap (0.001 for m) is left between the pavement layers andthe inside face of wall. This is to facilitate material analysis using the quantitytakeoff feature, as shown in the detail below.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
DaylightP2
Edge of the walk widthWalk_EdgeP3
RW_HingeP14
Could be used as breaklines in buildingdatum surface
RW_InsideP12
Could be used as breaklines in buildingdatum surface
RW_OutsideP5
TopL1, L2, L3
WallL2, L3
Bottom of the footingFootingL4,L5,L6
310 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Pave1L7
Pave2L8
Base, DatumL9
RWallS1
BarrierS2
Pave1S3
Pave2S4
BaseS5
Coding Diagram
RetainWallTieToDitch | 311
RetainWallToLowSideThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with one tapered side.
312 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
The wall is pushed to a side so that all of the footing is on the high fill side.This subassembly also adds an optional key at the bottom.
Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is incut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near the top of theretaining wall. The attachment point is near the footing if it is inserted in cutcondition.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted towards.
Side
0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall at thetop
Wall Top Width0.292 m
RetainWallToLowSide | 313
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
the distance between the top-of-thewall and the hook in fill or the newhook in cut.
Top Height
The depth of cover from the top-of-footing to the finish grade line on the
Footing Cover
back side of the wall in fill or to thehook when in cut.
YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional key belowthe footing
Key
Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point ofground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Wall battered slope,width of the footing, optional key dimensions, and the location of the keycenter, are all functions of the wall height.
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wallheight and tie to a profile. Assignedprofile corresponds to
ProfileWall Height
RequiredExisting ground surface name to deter-mine retaining wall in cut or fill.
SurfaceTarget Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either left or right sides. The attachmentpoint is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachment point isassumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of the wall,below the top of the wall, at a distance equal to the Top Height parameter. In
314 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
cut, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersectsthe inside face, above the top-of-footing, at a distance equal to the FootingCover parameter. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height orProfile input. In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway.In cut, the sloping wall face is away from the roadway, towards the earth beingretained. If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a singlehorizontal link. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key areinserted.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
RW_FrontP1
RW_TopP2
RW_BackP3
RW_HingeP14
Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface
RW_InsideP12
Could be used as breaklines in building da-tum surface
RW_OutsideP5
L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3 to P14;Top, WallL1, L2, L3
L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;DatumL4,L5,L6
RWallS1
RetainWallToLowSide | 315
Coding Diagram
Fill Condition
Cut Condition
RetainWallVerticalThis subassembly inserts a retaining wall structure with both sides as verticalwalls (no tapered side), and an optional key at the bottom.
316 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point varies depending on whether the retaining wall is incut condition or fill. If it is in fill, the attachment point is near top of theretaining wall. If it is in cut, the attachment point is near the footing.
RetainWallVertical | 317
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the sub-assembly is inserted towards.
Side
0.958 ftNumericSpecifies the width of the wall.Wall Width0.292 m
the distance between the top-of-the wall and the hook in fillor the new hook in cut.
Top Height
The depth of cover from thetop-of-footing to the finish
Footing Cover
grade line on the back side ofthe wall in fill or to the hookwhen in cut.
YesBooleanSpecies to add an optional keybelow the footing
Key
Wall height is determined from top of the footing to attachment point ofground elevation on the vertical face, whichever is higher. Width of thefooting, offset of wall vertical face, optional key dimensions, and the locationof the key center, are all functions of the wall height.
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed wallheight and tie to a profile. Assignedprofile corresponds to
ProfileWall Height
318 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredExisting ground surface name to deter-mine retaining wall in cut or fill.
SurfaceTarget Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly can be inserted on either the left or the right sides. Theattachment point is different for the fill or cut condition. In fill, the attachmentpoint is assumed to be where the finish grade intersects the inside face of thewall, below the top of the wall, at a distance equal to the Top Height parameter.In cut, the attachment point is assumed to be where the finish grade intersectsthe inside face, above the top-of-footing at a distance equal to the FootingCover parameter. The wall height is determined from the Wall Height orProfile input.
In fill, the sloping wall face is toward the center of the roadway. In cut, thesloping wall face is away from the roadway, towards the earth being retained.If the Key option is set to No, then the base of the footing is a single horizontallink. If the Key option is used, links to define the optional key are inserted.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the subassembly draws the retaining wall shape as specifiedby the input parameter values.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
RW_FrontP1
RW_TopP2
RW_BackP3
RW_HingeP14
RetainWallVertical | 319
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Could be used as breaklines in building datum surfaceRW_InsideP12
Could be used as breaklines in building datum surfaceRW_OutsideP5
L1=P1 to P2; L2= P2 to P3; L3 = P3 to P14;TopL1, L2, L3
L4 = P6 to P7; L5 = P8 to P9; L6 = 10 to 11;DatumL4,L5,L6
RWallS1
Coding Diagram
Fill Condition
Cut Condition
320 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
ShapeTrapezoidalThis subassembly inserts a trapezoidal shape with flexible parameters andcodes.
This shape can be used as a lane or a shoulder using superelevation parametersfor the slope. The width and outside edge elevation can be calculated basedon an optional alignment and profile. If multiple shapes are stacked, thebottom slope can be used as the top slope of subsequent shapes. If shapes arebutted together, the outside depth can be used as the inside depth of the nextsubassembly. The point, link, and shape codes are left undefined so the shapecan be used to represent different materials in various scenarios.
ShapeTrapezoidal | 321
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the shape.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightTrue inserts the shape to the left of the at-tachment point.
Side
False inserts the shoulder to the right of theattachment point.
2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to theshoulder outside point
Width8.0 ft
-2.0%NumericDefault cross slope of the shape surface. Thisvalue is used if the superelevation slope is
Default Cross Slope
not used or is not specified for the baselinealignment.
NoList of options:a.) No, b.) Out-
Specifies to use the slope from the superel-evation specification defined on the baselinealignment.
Use SuperelevationSlope
side Lane Slope,c.) Inside LaneSlope, d.) Out-side ShoulderSlope, e.) InsideShoulder Slope
0.25 mNumeric, positiveDepth at the attachment point.Inside Depth1.0 ft
0.125 mNumeric, positiveDepth opposite the attachment point.Outside Depth0.5 ft
User-defined point codes.Inside Top Codes
322 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
User-defined point codes.Outside Top Codes
User-defined point codes.Inside Bottom Codes
0.025 mNumeric, positiveUser-defined point codes.Outside BottomCodes 0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric, positiveUser-defined link codes.Bottom Link Codes0.333 ft
0.300 mNumericUser-defined shape codes.Shape Code1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Width andtie the edge-of-shape to an offset aligning.
AlignmentWidth
OptionalMay be used to override the normal shapeslope and tie the top outside shape edge tothe elevation of a profile.
ProfileOutside Elevation
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericSlope of the top linkTop Slope
NumericSlope of the bottom linkBottom Slope
NumericWidth of the shapeWidth
NumericOutside depth of the shapeOutside Depth
ShapeTrapezoidal | 323
Behavior
The finish grade of the shape is inserted for the given Width and % Slopeoutward from the attachment point. The bottom link slope is calculated basedon the inside and outside depth of the shape. The point, link, and shape codesare set in the input parameters using the user-defined strings.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shape fora normal crown roadway situation, with default cross slope as the top linkslope value.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodeType
User-defined point codeInside Top CodeP1
User-defined point codeOutside Top CodeP2
User-defined point codeInside Bottom CodeP3
User-defined point codeOutside Bottom CodeP4
User-defined link codeTop Link CodeL1
User-defined link codeBottom Link CodeL4
User-defined shape codeShape CodeS1
324 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
ShoulderExtendAllThis subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with all pavement, base, and subbaselayers extended to the shoulder daylight slope.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which istypically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.
ShoulderExtendAll | 325
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightTrue inserts the shoulder to the left of the attach-ment point.
Side
False inserts the shoulder to the right of the at-tachment point.
2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to the shoulderhinge point
Shoulder Width8.0 ft
NoList of op-tions: a.) No,
Specifies to use the slope from the superelevationspecification defined on the baseline alignment.
Use SuperelevationSlope
b.) Outsideshoulderslope, c.) In-side shoulderslope
- 2.0 %NumericDefault cross slope of the shape surface. Thisvalue is used if superelevation slope is not used,or is not specified for the baseline alignment.
Default ShoulderSlope
Hold slopeSelection listSelect whether to hold the daylight link to a fixedslope with variable width, or hold it to a fixedwidth with variable slope
Subbase DaylightType
4 ( : 1)Numeric,positive
The value of the fixed width or fixed slope (x :1) of the daylight link
Daylight Slope /Width
NoList of op-tions: a.) Yes,b.) No
Specifies to use shoulder superelevation slope tosubbase.
Superelevate SubBase
326 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
- 2.0 %NumericDefault cross slope of the shape surface. Thisvalue is used if superelevation slope is not used,or is not specified for the baseline alignment.
Default SubBaseSlope
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumericDepth of the subbase layer at the attachmentpoint
Subbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed ShoulderWidth and tie the edge-of-shoulder to anoffset alignment
AlignmentShoulder Width
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericSlope of the daylight linkDaylight Slope
NumericOffset of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Elevation
ShoulderExtendAll | 327
Behavior
The finish grade of the shoulder is inserted for the given Shoulder Width andDefault Shoulder Slope outward from the attachment point. The subbase linkis inserted from the attachment point starting at the Subbase Depth belowthe finish grade.
The shoulder daylight link can be inserted with either a fixed slope (HoldDaylight Slope = True), or a fixed width (Hold Daylight Slope = False). If afixed slope is used, the daylight link is extended from the outside edge of theshoulder until it intersects the subbase link. Otherwise, the subbase layer isextended for the Daylight Width beyond the outside edge of the shoulder,and the daylight link is connected to the end of the subbase.
The Pave1, Pave2, and Base surface links are inserted parallel to the finishgrade at the given depths until they intersect with the shoulder daylight link.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulderfor a normal crown roadway situation, using default shoulder and subbasecross slope.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodeType
Edge of paved shoulder, finish gradeEPSP2
Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS_Pave1P4
Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS_Pave2P6
Edge of paved shoulder on BaseEPS_BaseP8
Subbase daylight pointDaylight_SubP10
Paved finish gradeTop, Pave1L1, L3
Top of Pavement2Pave2L4
328 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodeType
Top of Pavement2Pave2, TopL6
Top of Pavement3Pave3L7
Top of Pavement3Pave3, TopL9
Top of the base courseBaseL10
Top of the base courseBase, TopL12
Bottom of subbaseSubbaseL15
Pave1S1
Pave2S2
BaseS3
SubbaseS4
ShoulderExtendAll | 329
Coding Diagram
ShoulderExtendSubbaseThis subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with the subbase layer extendedto a daylight point.
330 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which istypically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightTrue inserts the shoulder to the left of the attach-ment point.
Side
False inserts the shouler to the right of the attach-ment point.
2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to the shoulderhinge point
Shoulder Width8.0 ft
SOString% slope of the paved shoulder surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following
Shoulder % Slope
codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifi-cations of the baseline alignment:
ShoulderExtendSubbase | 331
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Code: Superelevation TypeSI: inside shoulder slopeSO: outside shoulder slope
Hold slopeSelectionlist
Select whether to hold the daylight link to a fixedslope with variable width, or hold it to a fixed widthwith variable slope
Subbase DaylightType
4 ( : 1)Numeric,positive
The value of the fixed width or fixed slope (x : 1) ofthe daylight link
Daylight Slope /Width
SOString% slope of the shoulder subbase surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following
Subbase Slope
codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifi-cations of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeSI: inside shoulder slopeSO: outside shoulder slope
0.0Numeric,positive
Width that the Pave1 layer extends beyond theshoulder hinge point. The bottom of the Pave1 layermay not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope.
Pave1 Extension
0.0Numeric,positive
Width that the Pave2 layer extends beyond theshoulder hinge point. This should be equal to or
Pave2 Extension
greater than the Pave1 Extension.The Pave2 layermay not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope.
0.0Numeric,positive
Width that the Base layer extends beyond theshoulder hinge point. This should be equal to or
Base Extension
greater than the Pave2 Extension. The Base layermay not extend beyond the shoulder sideslope.
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
332 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumericDepth of the subbase layer at the attachment pointSubbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Shoulder Widthand tie the edge-of-shoulder to an offset align-ment
AlignmentShoulder Width
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
NumericSlope of the daylight linkDaylight Slope
NumericOffset of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Offset
NumericElevation of the subgrade daylight pointDaylight Elevation
Behavior
The finish grade of the shoulder is inserted for the given Shoulder Width andShoulder % Slope outward from the attachment point, and the subbase linkis inserted from the attachment point offset starting at the Subbase Depthbelow the finish grade.
The shoulder daylight link can be inserted with either a fixed slope (HoldDaylight Slope = True) or a fixed width (Hold Daylight Slope = False). If a fixedslope is used, the daylight link is extended from the outside edge of shoulderuntil it intersects the subbase link. Otherwise the subbase layer is extendedfor the Daylight Width beyond the outside edge of shoulder, and the daylightlink is connected to the end of the subbase.
ShoulderExtendSubbase | 333
The Pave1, Pave2, and Base surface links are inserted parallel to the finishgrade at the given depths. If the layer Extension values are non-zero, eachlayer is extended for the given distance beyond the shoulder hinge point. Ifa layer extends past the daylight slope, the layer is terminated at the daylightslope intersection. Each layer should be as wide or wider than the one aboveit.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulderfor a normal crown roadway situation. If numeric slope values are given forthe Shoulder % Slope and Subbase % Slope, the links are shown at the givenslope values. Otherwise the default slopes of -6% are used.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodeType
Edge of paved shoulder, finish gradeEPSP2
Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS Pave1P4
Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS Pave2P13
Edge of paved shoulder on BaseEPS BaseP7
Subbase daylight pointDaylight SubP11
Paved finish gradeTop, PaveL1, L2
Pave1L4
Pave2L8
BaseL12
SubbaseL15Datum
334 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodeType
Unpaved finish gradeTop, GravelL14
Unpaved finish gradeAs shown belowOther Links
Pave1S1
Pave2S2
BaseS3
SubbaseS4
ShoulderExtendSubbase | 335
Coding Diagram
ShoulderVerticalSubbaseThis subassembly inserts a paved shoulder with the pavement and subbaselayers terminating with a vertical link.
336 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the paved shoulder, which istypically at the outside edge-of-traveled way.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightTrue inserts the shoulder to the left of the attach-ment point;
Side
False inserts the shoulder to the right of the attach-ment point.
2.4 mNumericWidth from the attachment point to the edge ofpaved shoulder
Paved Width8.0 ft
-6 (%)String% slope of the paved shoulder surface. The slopecan be a numeric value, or can use the following
Paved %Slope
codes to match pre-defined superelevation specifi-cations of the baseline alignment:Code: Superelevation TypeSI: inside shoulder slopeSO: outside shoulder slope
1Numeric,1 – 3
Determines when or if the unpaved portion of theshoulder is inserted. Value should be one of thefollowing:
Unpaved Link Treat-ment
Code: Treatment1: Always used2: Used only if shoulder is in cut3: Used only if shoulder is in cut, or is in fill on thehigh side of superelevation.
1.8 mNumeric,positive
Width of the unpaved portion of the shoulder. Setto zero to omit the unpaved link.
Unpaved Width6.0 ft
ShoulderVerticalSubbase | 337
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
-6 (%)Numeric,positive
% slope of the unpaved shoulder surfaceUnpaved % Slope
8 (%)Numeric,positive
Maximum breakover between the % slopes of thepaved and unpaved portions on the high side ofsuperelevation
Unpaved MaxBreakover
0.025mNumeric,positive
Depth between finish grade and Pave1Pave1 Depth0.083 ft
0.025 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave1 and Pave2Pave2 Depth0.083 ft
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth between Pave2 and BaseBase Depth0.333 ft
0.300 mNumericDepth between Base and SubbaseSubbase Depth1.0 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Paved Widthand tie the edge-of-shoulder to an offset align-ment
AlignmentPaved Width
Conditional;required if
Used to determine if the outside edge of pavedshoulder is in cut or fill. This parameter is notneeded if the Unpaved Link Treatment is 1.
SurfaceDaylight Surface
UnpavedLink Treat-ment is 2 or3.
Output Parameters
None.
338 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Behavior
The links for the shoulder finish grade, Pave1, Pave2, Base and Subbase areinserted outward using the given Paved Width, Paved % Slope, material depths.If the Unpaved Link Treatment is 1, the unpaved shoulder link is insertedunder all conditions. If the Treatment code is 2, the outside edge of the pavedshoulder is checked to determine if it is in cut or fill; the unpaved shoulderlink is inserted only in cut. Treatment code 3 uses the unpaved link in cut, orwhen the paved shoulder link has a positive %slope.The unpaved finish gradelink is inserted at the given Unpaved % Slope, unless the difference betweenthe Paved %Slope and Unpaved %Slope exceeds the Unpaved Max Breakovervalue. In that case the slope of the unpaved link is adjusted to hold thedifference to the given breakover..
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the links comprising the shoulderfor the normal crown roadway condition, based on the input parametersprovided. If a numeric value is given for the Paved %Slope, the paved portionof the shoulder is calculated based on that value. Otherwise the default valueof -6% is used.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
Edge of paved shoulderEPSP2
Edge of the unpaved shoulderES_UnpavedP3
Edge of paved shoulder on Pave1EPS_Pave1P5
Edge of paved shoulder on Pave2EPS_Pave2P7
Edge of paved shoulder on BaseEPS_BaseP9
Edge of paved shoulder on SubbaseEPS_SubP11
Paved finish gradeTop,L1Pave
ShoulderVerticalSubbase | 339
DescriptionCodePoint, Link,or Shape
Unpaved finish gradeTop,L2Datum
Pave1L3
Pave2L4
BaseL5
Subbase,L6Datum
DatumL7 – L10
Pave1S1
Pave2S2
BaseS3
SubbaseS4
Coding Diagram
340 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
SideDitchThe subassembly is used to create a ditch structure with optional backslopeand foreslopes.
Attachment
The attachment point is the innermost point on the grading links precedingthe ditch structure. If grading links are omitted, then the attachment pointis the innermost point on the inside wall of the ditch structure (shown in bluecircle).
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted.
Side
SideDitch | 341
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.45 mNumeric, PositiveInside depth of the ditch.Depth1.5 ft
0.5 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of bottom of the channel.Bottom Width1.5 ft
1:2NumericDitch sideslopesSideslope
0.1 mNumeric, PositiveDepth of the ditch wallDitch Wall Depth0.33 ft
0.15 mNumeric, PositiveNon-lined extension of ditch insideover the attachment point
Inside ExtensionHeight 0.45 ft
1.5 mNumeric, PositiveDitch backfill width on left sideInside BackslopeWidth 5.0 ft
0.1 mNumeric, PositiveWidth of non-lined width beyond theouter point of the ditch structure
Outside BackslopeWidth 0.33 ft
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in the aboveillustration.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly is created outward, starting from theattachment point, as defined using the input parameters.
342 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Ditch_BackP1, P6
Ditch_FaceP2, P5
Ditch_InP10
Ditch_OutP11
Top, DatumL9, L10, L11
Top, Ditch_TopL1 to L5
Datum, Ditch_BottomL6, L7, L8
Ditch structure shape areaDitchS1
Coding Diagram
SideDitch | 343
SideDitchUShapeThis subassembly creates a ditch structure with optional bench and backslopeson the inside and the outside of the structure.
Attachment
The attachment point is the innermost point of the optional inside bench. Ifinside benches are omitted, the attachment point is on the innermost pointof the inside wall of the ditch structure.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted towards.
Side
2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveBottom width of the ditchBottom Width0.6 m
2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the ditchDitch Depth
344 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.6 m
0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of the inside wall at the topA10.15m
0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveIncreased wall thickness of the insidewall at the bottom
B10.2m
0.5 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of ditch bottom liningC0.15 m
2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the tapered face on the in-side wall
D0.6 m
0.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the hinge point where thestart of inside bench/backslope linksis located
E10.0 m
1.5 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the (optional) inside bench.Enter ZERO for no bench
Inside BenchWidth 0.5 m
4%Numeric, Grade typeCross grade of the (optional) insidebench. It is measured away from the
Inside BenchGrade
ditch structure edge, and a positiveslope indicates rising bench from theditch
1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveInside backslope link (optional)width. Enter ZERO value for nobackslope link
F10.3 m
1:1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) inside backs-lope link. It is measured away from
G1
the ditch structure, and a positiveslope indicates rising link from thestart point
SideDitchUShape | 345
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of the inside wall at the topA20.15 m
0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveTapered width of the outside wallB20.2 m
1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the hinge point for the startof outside bench/backslope links
E20.3 m
3.0 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the (optional) outsidebench. Enter ZERO for no bench
Outside BenchWidth 1.0 m
4%Numeric, Grade typeCross grade of the (optional) outsidebench. It is measured away from the
Outside BenchGrade
ditch structure edge, and a positiveslope indicates rising bench from theditch
1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveOutside backslope link (optional)width. Enter ZERO value for nobackslope link
F20.3 m
1:1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) outside back-slope link. It is measured away from
G2
the ditch structure, and a positiveslope indicates rising link from thestart point
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
346 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Output Parameters
Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in theillustration. To omit benching and foreslope links, enter zero for theappropriate width parameters.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Ditch_InP10
Ditch_BackP1, P6
Ditch_FaceP2, P5
Ditch_OutP14
TopL10, L13
If the offsets of P11 is < P8; and P13 is > P9respectively
DatumL10, L13
TopL11
TopL12
TopL1 and L5
Ditch_TopL1 to L5
DatumL8 and L9
SideDitchUShape | 347
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
BackfillL10, to L13
Backfill_FaceL6
Ditch structure shape areaDitchS1
Coding Diagram
SideDitchWithLidThis subassembly creates a ditch structure to add to either the left or the rightsides of the assembly.
348 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Optionally, this subassembly can add daylight links on either side of thestructure.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the innermost point on the grading links precedingthe ditch structure. If the grading links on the inside are omitted, then theattachment point is on the innermost point of the inside wall.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side thesubassembly is inserted to-wards.
Side
2.0ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the ditch on theinside
Ditch Depth0.6m
SideDitchWithLid | 349
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
1.0ftNumeric, PositiveBottom width of the ditchBottom Width0.3m
2.0ftNumeric, PositiveDitch opening at the lidTop Width0.6m
0ftNumeric, PositiveGap between the lid sidesand the inside walls
Lid Gap0m
0.45ftNumeric, PositiveTop inside wall thicknessnear the lid
A10.15m
0.6ftNumeric, PositiveInside wall thickness of theditch structure
B10.2m
0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveLid depth on the insideC10.2 m
0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveDitch bottom bed depthD0.2 m
1.5 ftNumeric, positiveWidth of the (optional) in-side bench. Enter ZERO forno bench
Inside Bench Width0.5 m
4%Numeric, Grade typeCross grade of the (option-al) inside bench. It is mea-
Inside Bench Grade
sured away from the ditchstructure edge, and a posi-tive slope indicates risingbench from the ditch
1.0 ftNumericInside backslope link (op-tional) width. Enter ZEROvalue for no backslope link
F10.3 m
350 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
1:1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) in-side backslope link. It is
G1
measured away from theditch structure, and a posi-tive slope indicates risinglink from the start point
0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveTop outside wall thicknessnear the lid
A20.15 m
0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveOutside wall thickness ofthe ditch structure
B20.2 m
0.45 ftNumeric, PositiveLid depth on the outsideC20.15 m
0 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the hinge pointwhere the start of outside
E0 m
bench/backslope links is lo-cated
3.5ftOutside Bench WidthWidth of the (optional)outside bench. Enter ZEROfor no bench
Outside Bench Width1.1m
4%Outside Bench GradeCross grade of the (option-al) outside bench. It is mea-
Outside Bench Grade
sured away from the ditchstructure edge, and a posi-tive slope indicates risingbench from the ditch
0.3Numeric, PositiveOutside backslope link (op-tional) width. Enter ZEROvalue for no backslope link
F2
1 : 1Numeric, Slope typeSlope of the (optional) out-side backslope link. It is
G2
SideDitchWithLid | 351
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
measured away from theditch structure, and a posi-tive slope indicates risinglink from the start point
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a ditch structure, as shown in the aboveillustration. To omit the daylight and bench links, enter a zero value for theappropriate width parameters.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Ditch_InP1
Ditch_BackP1, P4
Ditch_Lid_FaceP2, P3
L2 is defined by these two pointsLid_TopP15, P16
Ditch_Back_FillP21
352 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Ditch_OutP23
Top, DatumL18, L19, L20, L21
TopL1, L2, L3
DatumL4, L5, L6
Ditch structure shape areaDitchS1
Lid structure areaLidS2
Coding Diagram
SideDitchWithLid | 353
SnapToMarkedPointThis subassembly is a general purpose subassembly to connect a link from theattachment point to a previously named marked point.
Unlike the LinkToMarkedPoint subassembly, with the SnapToMarkedPointsubassembly the previously named marked point can be on any subassemblygroup. The SnapToMarkedPoint subassembly can be used in a variety ofsituations, including connecting between adjacent roadways where the relativeoffsets and elevations vary, or across a gore area between converging roadways.Use the MarkPoint subassembly if the connecting point has not already beennamed.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the beginning of the link. The link may go in anydirection. The direction is determined by the location of the marked pointrelative to the attachment point.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName of the marked point to connectto.
Marked Point Name
354 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
Top, DatumComma-sepa-rated string
A list of codes to be assigned to the link.Link Codes
True / FalseTrue to addthe end pointonly.
False to add the link, the start point, andthe end point.
Omit Link
False
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
TypeDescriptionParameter
Numeric+/- offset of the beginning of the link.Begin Offset
NumericElevation of the beginning of the linkBegin Elevation
Numeric+/- offset of the end of the linkEnd Offset
NumericElevation of the end of the linkEnd Elevation
Behavior
A link is added from the attachment point to the given marked point.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the subassembly displays the link between the attachmentpoint and the marked point.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
None.
SnapToMarkedPoint | 355
Coding Diagram
StrippingPavementThis subassembly is used to specify the existing top layer stripping to a specifieddepth.
356 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Optionally, this subassembly can extend the stripping back to the existingground with a specified backslope.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the daylight point on the finish grade.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.05mNumericSpecifies depth of the topsoil toremove.
Stripping Depth0.167ft
YesBooleanSpecifies to extend the strippingback to existing ground
Extend to Existing Ground
-2 (:1)NumericDefault foreslope of the strippingextension from original daylight
Foreslope
point to beginning of backslope.
2 (:1)Numeric, positiveBackslope to grade from bottomof stripping back into the exist-ing ground
Backslope
StrippingPavement | 357
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the existing surface tograde back from bottom of stripping.
SurfaceExisting Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the bottom of the strippinglayer below a specified surface. If the option to extend stripping to the existingground with a backslope is set to No, then stripping starts at the attachmentpoint directly on the specified surface, with a vertical link with depth valuespecified in the input parameters. From the bottom of this vertical link, aseries of links parallel to the specified surface are introduced inwards, untilthe baseline location of the assembly. If the option to extend stripping to theexisting ground is set to Yes, then at the attachment point, a link is introducedwith the specified foreslope, until the elevation difference between the bottomof this new link and the specified existing ground is equal to the “strippingdepth”. From this point, a series of links parallel to the specified surface areintroduced inwards, until the baseline location of the assembly. Additionally,another link outwardly is added to daylight to existing ground.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly inserts a horizontal line below theattachment point, towards the baseline location. This link is inserted fromthe attachment point at a depth equal to the “stripping depth”.
If the option to extend the stripping link to a surface is selected, then aforeslope link with a specified slope value to the stripping depth is insertedfirst, and then the horizontal link is added, as explained previously. Also, abackslope link is added outward, from the outside bottom of the strippinglink with a specified foreslope, and to the elevation equal to the subassemblyattachment point.
358 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Daylight point of stripping backslope linkDaylight_Strip (Only for Case 1)P3
Stripping foreslope link defining backfillForeslope_Stripping (Only for case 1)L1
Stripping linksStrippingL2, L3, L4… Ln
Coding Diagram
StrippingPavement | 359
StrippingTopSoilThis subassembly is used to specify stripping of top soil to a specified depth.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside of the stripping link.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft /Right/Right
Specifies the direction of stripping withrespect to attachment point.
Side
0.05mNumericSpecifies depth of the topsoil to remove.Stripping Depth0.167ft
5mNumericSpecifies width of the topsoil strippingregion.
Stripping Width16.67ft
-2 (:1)NumericDefault foreslope of the stripping exten-sion from original daylight point to be-ginning of back slope.
Foreslope
360 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2 (:1)Numeric,positive
Backslope to grade from bottom ofstripping back into the existing ground
Backslope
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixedStripping Width and tie to an offsetalignment.
AlignmentStripping Width
RequiredName of the existing surface to gradeback from bottom of stripping.
SurfaceExisting Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Behavior
This subassembly inserts parallel links defining the bottom of the strippinglayer below a specified surface.
If the option to extend stripping to the existing ground with a backslopes isset to No, then stripping starts at the attachment point, directly on thespecified surface, with a vertical link that has the depth value specified in theinput parameters. From the bottom of this vertical link, a series of links parallelto the specified surface are introduced inwards, until baseline location of theassembly.
From the attachment point, a link is created with a specified foreslope. Thelink is drawn until the elevation difference between its lowest point and theexisting ground is equal to the “stripping depth”. Also, a backslope link isintroduced inwards, from the topsoil surface, from an offset defined by the“stripping width” parameter. Next a series of links parallel to the specifiedtopsoil surface are introduced, connecting above two new links to define thestripping layer.
StrippingTopSoil | 361
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, foreslope and backslope links are added using the inputparameters. Connecting the bottom of these two links, a horizontal line isadded to represent the stripping layer.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Daylight point of stripping backslope linkDaylight_StripP2
Stripping linksStrippingAll Links
Coding Diagram
TrenchWithPipeThis subassembly creates a stone-filled drain structure with a circular pipeinside.
362 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Attachment
The attachment point for this subassembly can be at the bottom center, thetop center, or the top corner of the drain structure.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1), unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft / RightIndicates which side the subassemblyis inserted towards.
Side
Top cornerString; (a) Top center; (b)Bottom center, (c) Topcorner
Specifies location of subassembly at-tachment point.
Attachment Point
1.0 ftNumeric, PositiveBottom Width of the trenchBottom Width0.3 m
TrenchWithPipe | 363
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
1.5 ftNumeric, PositiveTop width of the trenchTop Width0.5 m
2.0 ftNumeric, PositiveTotal depth of the trenchDepth0.6 m
0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveDepth of the pipe bedding over trenchbottom
Bedding Depth0.2 m
0.6 ftNumeric, PositiveDrain pipe diameterPipe Diameter0.2 ft
0.0 ftNumeric, PositiveThickness of the pipe material (option-al)
Pipe Thickness0.0 m
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalDepth of the trench can be optionally be over-ridden from a profile elevation. If the attachment
ProfileDepth
point is on the top of the trench, then this profileis assigned for the trench bottom and vice-versa.
Output Parameters
Behavior
The subassembly builds the shape for a simple drain structure as shown in theabove illustration.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly draws as it is defined using the inputparameters, starting from the attachment point.
364 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodesPoint/Link
Drain_BottomP1
Drain_Bottom_OutsideP2
Drain_Top_OutsideP3
Drain_Top_InsideP4
Drain_Bottom_InsideP5
Drain_CenterP6
Use existing point code, if any, among curband gutters.
Flow_LineP7
Top, Drain_TopL1
Datum, Drain_BottomL2, L3, L4
Trench_BackfillS1
Drain_AreaS2
TrenchWithPipe | 365
Coding Diagram
TrenchPipe1This subassembly creates a flat-bottom trench with equal sideslopes and upto three layers of backfill material.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the Offset To Bottom distance above the midpointof the base of the trench.
366 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
2.0 mNumeric,positive
Width of the bottom of the trenchWidth6.0 ft
3 : 1Numeric,positive
X : 1 slope of the trench sideslopesSideslope
0.0Numeric,positive
Depth of the bedding layerBedding Depth
0.0Numeric,positive
Depth of the special backfill layerSpecial BackfillDepth
0.0Numeric,positive
The vertical offset down from the profile grade lineelevation to the bottom of the trench. For example,
Offset to Bottom
if the profile runs along the top of a circular pipe,the vertical offset is the pipe diameter plus the dis-tance from the bottom of the pipe to the bottomof the trench.
Behavior
The elevation of the bottom of the trench is calculated as the profile gradeline elevation minus the Offset To Bottom value. The horizontal trench bottomlink is placed symmetrically about the attachment point offset at that elevation,and the sideslopes are extended upward to the Existing Surface. The horizontalBedding link is placed at the given depth above the trench bottom. Thehorizontal Special Backfill link is placed at the given depth above the Beddinglink.
TrenchPipe1 | 367
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredSurface model defining theexisting roadway surface
SurfaceExisting Surface
Output Parameters
None.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, the trench and existing surface are drawn as shown below.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Trench_BottomP1, P2
Trench_DaylightP3, P4
Trench_BeddingP5, P6
368 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Trench_BackfillP7, P8
Trench DatumL1 – L7
Trench_BottomL8
Trench_DaylightL9
Trench_BeddingS1
Trench_BackfillS2
Coding Diagram
UrbanCurbGutterGeneralThis subassembly inserts links for a standard shape concrete curb-and-gutterwith subbase.
User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.
UrbanCurbGutterGeneral | 369
Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.
Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
GutterEdge
BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter aseither Gutter Edge or Back of Curb
Insertion Point
Outsidelane su-
BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Use out-side lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Usedepth of flow line from flange point.
Gutter SlopeMethod
pereleva-tion slope
- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope
0.450 mNumeric,positive
Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.
Subbase Depth1.5 ft
370 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.3 mNumeric,positive
Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at theback-of-curb.
Subbase Exten-sion 1.0 ft
Use superel-evation
Selection listSelects whether to use the Outside Lane supereleva-tion slope for the subbase layer, or to set a numeric% slope value
Use SE
-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE isset to True.
Subbase %Slope
175 mmNumeric,positive,
Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A(mm/in) 7 in
non-zero
400 mmWidth from the flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension B16 in(mm/in)
25 mmNumeric,positive,
Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension C(mm/in) 1 in
non-zero
150 mmNumeric,positive,
Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb
Dimension D(mm/in) 6 in
non-zero
200 mmNumeric,positive,
Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curbDimension E(mm/in) 8 in
non-zero
150 mmNumeric,positive,
Width of the top-of-curbDimension F(mm/in) 6 in
non-zero
325 mmNumeric,positive,
Height of the back-of-curbDimension G(mm/in) 13 in
non-zero
UrbanCurbGutterGeneral | 371
Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensionsDimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values.If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the backof curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layercloses to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.
The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true,the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1
Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2
Top-of-curbTopCurbP3
Back-of-curbBackCurbP4
Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1 – L3Curb
372 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
SubbaseL7Datum
Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1
SubbaseS2
Coding Diagram
UrbanCurbGutterValley1This subassembly inserts links for a flat-bottomed valley curb and gutter withsubbase.
User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.
UrbanCurbGutterValley1 | 373
Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.
Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
Gutter EdgeBooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter aseither Gutter Edge or Back of Curb
Insertion Point
Outside lanesupereleva-tion slope
BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Useoutside lane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Usedepth of flow line from flange point.
Gutter SlopeMethod
- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope
0.450 mNumeric, posi-tive
Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.
Subbase Depth1.5 ft
0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive
Distance the subbase is extended beyond theback-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbaseat the back-of-curb
Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft
374 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
TrueTrue/FalseTrue uses the outside lane superelevation slopefor the subbase layer.
Use SE
False specifies a numeric %slope.
-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SEis set to True.
Subbase %Slope
175 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A7 in
non-zero
375 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Width from the gutter flange point to the gutterflowline
Dimension B15 in
non-zero
25 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutterflowline
Dimension C1 in
non-zero
75 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Height from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension D3 in
non-zero
225 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension E9 in
non-zero
250 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Height of the back-of-curbDimension F9 in
non-zero
Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensionsDimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values.If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the backof curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layercloses to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.
UrbanCurbGutterValley1 | 375
The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true,the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1
Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2
Top-of-curbTopCurbP3BackCurb
Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1, L2Curb
SubbaseL6Datum
Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1
SubbaseS2
376 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
UrbanCurbGutterValley2This subassembly inserts links for a slope-bottomed valley curb and gutterwith subbase.
User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.
UrbanCurbGutterValley2 | 377
Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
GutterEdge
BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as eitherGutter Edge or Back of Curb
Insertion Point
Outsidelane su-
BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outside lanesuperelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flow linefrom flange point.
Gutter SlopeMethod
pereleva-tion slope
- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope
0.450 mNumeric,positive
Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there isno subbase.
SubbaseDepth 1.5 ft
0.3 mNumeric,positive
Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb.Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb.
Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft
TrueTrue/FalseTrue uses the outside lane superelevation slope for thesubbase layer.
Use SE
False specifies a numeric %slope.
-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SE is set toTrue.
Subbase%Slope
150 mmNumeric,positive,
Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A6 in
non-zero
610 mmNumeric,positive,
Width from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension B24 in
non-zero
378 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
100 mmNumeric,positive,
Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline,and from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb
Dimension C4 in
non-zero
225 mmNumeric,positive,
Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension D9 in
non-zero
75 mmNumeric,positive,
Width from the top-of-curb to back-of-curbDimension E3 in
non-zero
300 mmNumeric,positive,
Height of the back-of-curbDimension F12 in
non-zero
Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter dimensionsDimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zero values.If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted to the backof curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbase layercloses to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.
The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
Output Parameters
None.
UrbanCurbGutterValley2 | 379
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If the Use SE parameter is set to true,the subbase layer is inserted at a slope of -2%.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1
Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2
Top-of-curbTopCurbP3
Back-of-curbBackCurbP4
Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1 – L3Curb
SubbaseL7Datum
Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1
SubbaseS2
380 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
UrbanCurbGutterValley3This subassembly inserts links for a slope-bottomed valley curb and gutterwith subbase.
The bottom surface of the curve flattens to a horizontal link at the gutterflowline. User-defined input parameters control the dimensions of the shape.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the flange point of the gutter or the back of thecurb.
UrbanCurbGutterValley3 | 381
Input Parameters
Note: Subbase dimensions are in meters or feet. Curb-and-gutter dimensionsmust be given in millimeters or inches.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
GutterEdge
BooleanSpecifies insertion point of the curb and gutter as eitherGutter Edge or Back of Curb
Insertion Point
Outsidelane su-
BooleanSpecifies method of gutter slope input as: Use outsidelane superelevation slope; Fixed slope; Use depth of flowline from flange point.
Gutter SlopeMethod
pereleva-tion slope
- 2%NumericSpecifies fixed gutter slopeGutter Slope
0.450 mNumeric,positive
Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero if there isno subbase.
Subbase Depth1.5 ft
0.3 mNumeric,positive
Distance the subbase is extended beyond the back-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbase at the back-of-curb.
Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft
-2 (%)Numeric orstring
% slope of the subbase layer. The slope can be a numericvalue, or can use the following codes to match pre-de-
Subbase%Slope
fined superelevation specifications of the baseline align-ment:LI – inside lane slopeLO – outside lane slopeSI – inside shoulder slopeSO – outside shoulder slope
150 mmNumeric,positive,
Depth of the gutter at the flange pointDimension A6 in
non-zero
382 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
600 mmNumeric,positive,
Width from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowlineDimension B24 in
non-zero
50 mmNumeric,positive,
Depth from the gutter flange point to the gutter flowline,and from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb
Dimension C2 in
non-zero
40 mmNumeric,positive,
Width from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curbDimension D1.5 in
non-zero
150 mmNumeric,positive,
Width from the top-of-curb to back-of-curbDimension E6 in
non-zero
300 mmNumeric,positive,
Height of the back-of-curbDimension F12 in
non-zero
Behavior
The curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameter valuesfor Dimension A – Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive, non-zerovalues. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer is inserted tothe back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width. The subbaselayer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb, as shown in the diagram.
The subassembly builds the shape for a simple curb and gutter, with theattachment point either at (a) inside edge of the gutter (or lip), or (b) the backof the curb. The face of the curb is given a small, constant width to make itnon-vertical.
Runtime Logical Assignments
None.
UrbanCurbGutterValley3 | 383
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the curb-and-gutter componentbased on the input parameters given. If a numeric value is given for the Subbase%Slope, the subbase layer is inserted at the given slope value. Otherwise thedefault value of -2% is used.
Output Parameters
None.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1
Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2
Top-of-curbTopCurbP3
Back-of-curbBackCurbP4
Finish grade on the curb and gutterTop,L1 – L3Curb
SubbaseL8Datum
Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1
SubbaseS2
384 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1This subassembly is used to replace an existing curb and gutter, with the sodstrip tying to the existing inside edge of sidewalk. The vertical placement ofcurb and gutter is determined by allowable milling and/or overlay at the flangepoints and by allowable ranges of slopes for sod strip.
To apply this subassembly, flange point information (alignment or offsetvalue) is essential.
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 385
Attachment
The attachment point is outside/highside point of the sod strip edge of thesidewalk. Though notionally this attachment point is to mark the highsideof the sodstrip, actual location of sod strip high point could vary from this asthe user attaches an appropriate marked point or alignment and profile.Therefore, this attachment point is more of layout time assistance rather thandesign point control.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run over rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slopewith a "%" sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightIndicates the position of the curb and gutter withrespect to the attachment point.
Side
3.6 mNumericPoint defining the offset of the face of the flangeof the gutter. This offset is as neasured from thebaseline point.
Flange Point Off-set from CL 10 ft
NoneStringThis inside sidewalk point will be used as the highpoint of sod strip. (OPTIONAL)
Sidewalk Point
386 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
0.05 mNumeric, posi-tive
Maximum allowable depth of the flange pointbelow the edge of existing pavement.
Max Milling2.5 in
0.08m3.5 in
Numeric, posi-tive
Desirable difference in elevation from the edge ofexisting pavement to the flange point. A positive
Desirable Lift
value is for the flange point being above the exist-ing pavement.
0.02Minimum allowable slope from the back of curbto the sidewalk point.
Min Sod Slope
0.06Maximum allowable slope from the back of curbto the sidewalk point.
Max Sod Slope
NoneStringMark Flange Point - name of a marked point tobe stored at the flange point - for later rehabsubassemblies.
Mark InsidePoint
The following are the same parameters as Cur-bAndGutterGeneral subassembly.
0.450 mNumeric, posi-tive
Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.
Subbase Depth1.5 ft
0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive
Distance the subbase is extended beyond theback-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbaseat the back-of-curb.
Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft
-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SEis set to True.
Subbase %Slope
150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Depth of the gutter at the flange point.Dimension A(mm/in) 6 in
non-zero
400 mmWidth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension B16 in(mm/in)
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 387
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
25 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension C(mm/in) 1 in
non-zero
150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb.
Dimension D(mm/in) 6 in
non-zero
200 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curb.Dimension E(mm/in) 8 in
non-zero
150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Width of the top-of-curb.Dimension F(mm/in) 6 in
non-zero
325 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Height of the back-of-curb.Dimension G(mm/in) 13 in
non-zero
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalThis will set the offset value for the highsidepoint for sod strip.
AlignmentInside Edge of Sidewalk
OptionalThis will establish the offset value of flangepoint to start the subassembly.
AlignmentFlange Point
OptionalThis will set the offset value for the highsidepoint for sod strip.
ProfileLeft Gutter Profile
RequiredName of the existing surface, used to deter-mine the edge of pavement elevation at the
SurfaceEGTopSurf
flange point, and is also used to determine
388 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
the elevation of the Sidewalk Point if given asan offset or alignment; but profiles not set.
If marked points are provided, runtime logical assignments are unnecessaryand will be ignored even if set. If marked points are not set and offsets oralignments are used to locate points, it is expected to set profiles throughlogical assignment. If they are not, this subassembly takes its elevation fromsurface set in above logical name mapping.
Output Parameters
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NumericCross slope of designed sod stripSod Strip Slope
Numeric, posi-tive
Gutter slope in the new curb and gutter subassem-bly
Gutter Slope
Behavior
This subassembly is used to place a new curb and gutter parametrically, andcan optionally tie (with a sod strip) into either the inside edge of the existingsidewalk, or to a new sidewalk created with another subasembly. The horizontalplacement of the curb and gutter is determined from the previously knownflange point location. Highside of the sod strip can be located either by a fixedoffset or any other marked point, such as the inside edge of sidewalk.Alternatively, this point can come from logical assignment of an aligmentand profile. Newly designed flange point, optionally marked so that it can beused as input later for replacement lane subassemblies.
Key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows:
1 Get existing pavement elevation at the flange point offset.
2 Set flange point elevation based on the minimum lift value.
3 Next insert curb and gutter points from P to P4 using the input parameters(similar to CurbAndGutterGeneral).
4 If the inside sidewalk marked point is assigned, establish that point asP10. If marked point is not associated, look for logical assignements for
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 389
'inside edge of sidewalk" alignment. If yes, then get profile elevation orfrom the surface logical name mapping.
5 If none of the above data is available for the highside of the sod strip,use the offset as dictated by attachment point to establish point P10.
6 Find the slope between P4 and P10.
7 Check whether that slope is within the parameters of Min/Max sod stripslopes.
8 If it is lower than minimum, set the slope to minimum allowable andcomputed points P4 to P1 backwards. Similarly, if the slope is more thanmaximum allowable sod strip slopes, set it to maximum allowable andcalculate P4 to P1.
9 Check whether the elevation difference between P1 and P11 is withintolerable limits of max milling. If P is below P11 and difference is morethan max milling, then abort, resulting in an error displayed in the eventviewer.
All other curb and gutter links are inserted, based on the Input Parameterdimensions Dimension A - Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive,non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer isinserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width.The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb as shown in the diagram.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode , this subassembly is set based on the attachment point andthe default flange point offset from baseline. The width of the sod strip iscomputed by subtracting the curb and gutter total widt from "flange point toattacment point" distance. The minimum allowable sod strip slope is used tocalculate the back of curb point from which the rest of the curb and gutter isdrawn, using the input parameters given.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1
Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2
390 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Top-of-curbTopCurbP3
Back-of-curbBackCurbP4
All curb linksCurbL1–L6
Finish grade on the curb and gutterTopL1–L3
SubbaseL7Datum
DatumL4, L8, L9
Top, Datum, SodL11
Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1
SubbaseS2
Coding Diagram
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 | 391
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2This subassembly is used to replace an existing curb and gutter, with the sodstrip tying to the existing inside edge of sidewalk. The vertical placement ofthe curb and gutter is controlled by a design profile of the back of curb.
To apply this subassembly, flange point information (alignment or offsetvalue) is essential.
Attachment
The attachment point is outside/highside point of the sod strip edge of thesidewalk. Though notionally this attachment point is to mark the highsideof the sodstrip, actual location of sod strip high point could vary from this asthe user attaches an appropriate marked point or alignment and profile.Therefore, this attachment point is more of layout time assistance rather thandesign point control.
392 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run over rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percent slopewith a "%" sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightIndicates the position of the curb and gutter withrespect to the attachment point.
Side
3.6 mNumericPoint defining the offset of the face of the flangeof the gutter. This offset is as measured from the
Flange Point Off-set from CL 10 ft
baseline of the assembly (or corridor in corridorstate).
NoneStringThis inside sidewalk point will be used as the highpoint of sod strip. (OPTIONAL)
Sidewalk Point
NoneStringMark Flange Point - name of a marked point tobe stored at the flange point - for later rehabsubassemblies.
Mark InsidePoint
The following are the same parameters as Cur-bAndGutterGeneral subassembly.
0.450 mNumeric, posi-tive
Depth to subbase at the flange point. Use zero ifthere is no subbase.
Subbase Depth1.5 ft
0.3 mNumeric, posi-tive
Distance the subbase is extended beyond theback-of-curb. Use zero to terminate the subbaseat the back-of-curb.
Subbase Exten-sion 1 ft
-2 (%)Numeric% slope of the subbase layer. Not used if Use SEis set to True.
Subbase %Slope
175 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Depth of the gutter at the flange point.Dimension A(mm/in) 7 in
non-zero
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 | 393
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
400 mmWidth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension B16 in(mm/in)
25 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Depth from the flange point to the gutter flowline.Dimension C(mm/in) 1 in
non-zero
150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Height of curb from the gutter flowline to the top-of-curb.
Dimension D(mm/in) 6 in
non-zero
200 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Width from the gutter flowline to the back-of-curb.Dimension E(mm/in) 8 in
non-zero
150 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Width of the top-of-curb.Dimension F(mm/in) 6 in
non-zero
325 mmNumeric, posi-tive,
Height of the back-of-curb.Dimension G(mm/in) 13 in
non-zero
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalThis will set offset value for the highside pointfor sod strip.
AlignmentInside Edge of Sidewalk
OptionalThis will establish offfest of flange point tostart the subassembly.
AlignmentFlange Point
RequiredThis helps position curb and gutter.ProfileBack of Curb Profile
OptionalThis will set offset value for the highside pointfor sod strip.
ProfileInside Edge of Sidewalk
394 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
RequiredName of the existing surface, used to deter-mine the edge of pavement elevation at the
SurfaceEGTopSurf
flange point, and is also used to determinethe elevation of the Sidewalk Point if given asan offset or alignment; but profiles not set.
If marked points are provided, runtime logical assignments are unnecessaryand will be ignored even if set. If marked points are not set and offsets oralignments are used to locate points, it is expected to set profiles throughlogical assignment. If they are not, this subassembly takes elevation fromsurface set in above logical name mapping.
If Back of Curb profile is not assigned in corridor definition, then thesubassembly aborts with an error message in event viewer.
Output Parameters
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NumericCross slope of designed sod stripSod Strip Slope
Numeric, posi-tive
Gutter slope in the new curb and gutter subassem-bly
Gutter Slope
Behavior
This subassembly is used to place a new curb and gutter parametrically, andcan optionally tie (with a sod strip) into either the inside edge of the existingsidewalk, or to a new sidewalk created with another subasembly. The horizontalplacement of the curb and gutter is determined from the previously knowflange point location. Highside of the sod strip can be located either by a fixedoffset or any other marked point, such as inside edge of sidewalk. Alternativelythis point can come from logical assignment of an aligment and profile. Newlydesigned flange point, optionally marked so that it can be used as input laterfor replacement lane subassemblies.
Key steps in completing this conditional subassembly are as follows:
1 From flange point offset and the input parameters locate the offset of“back of curb”.
UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 | 395
2 From the logical assignment, get the "back of curb" elevation at thatstation and establish this point P4.
3 From this point establish all curb and gutter points and links using theinput parameters (similar to UrbanCurbGutterGeneral1
4 If inside sidewalk marked point is assigned, establish that point as P10.If marked point is not associated, look for logical assignments for 'insideedge of sidewalk" alignment. If yes then get profile elevation or from thesurface logical name mapping.
5 If none of the above data is available for the highside of the sod strip,use the offset as dictated by attachment point to establish point P10.
All other curb and gutter links are inserted based on the Input Parameterdimensions Dimension A - Dimension F. All dimensions must be positive,non-zero values. If a non-zero subbase depth is given, the subbase layer isinserted to the back of curb, and continues for the Subbase Extension width.The subbase layer closes to the bottom-back-of-curb as shown in the diagram.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode the subassembly is set based on the attachment point and thedefault flange point offset from baseline. Width of the sod strip is computedby subtracting the curb and gutter total width from "flange point to attachmentpoint" distance. Use 2% slope to calculate the low side of sod strip (or back ofcurb point), from which the rest of curb and gutter is drawn using the inputparameters given.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Flange point of the gutterFlangeP1
Gutter flowline pointFlowline_GutterP2
Top-of-curbTopCurbP3
Back-of-curbBackCurbP4
All curb linksCurbL1–L6
396 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Finish grade on the curb and gutterTopL1–L3
SubbaseL7Datum
DatumL4, L8, L9
Top, Datum, SodL11
Curb-and-gutter concrete areaCurbS1
SubbaseS2
Coding Diagram
UrbanReplaceSidewalkThis subassembly is used to replace an existing sidewalk, starting at the existingoutside edge of sidewalk and inserting surfaces towards the curb.
To use this subassembly, you should have separate alignments defining theexisting outside edge of sidewalk information. Elevations at this point couldcome from a surface or a profile. Furthermore, if the component defining this
UrbanReplaceSidewalk | 397
edge is also another rehab component, then they could be passed in as markedpoints, thus transferring offset and elevation information.
Attachment
The attachment point is (near) the outside edge of the sidewalk. For betterresults, insert this on a controlling offset (with fixed offset) marker pointduring assembly construction.
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightIndicates the inward direction of the sidewalk.Side
NoneStringTo define outside edge of sidewalk and elevationto start the subassembly (OPTIONAL)
Outside SidewalkMarked Point
1.5mNumericWidth of the sidewalk, measuring inwards fromhigh edge of sidewalk point
Width5.0ft
-2%NumericCross slope of sidewalk in %, measuring inwardsfrom high edge of sidewalk
% Slope
Numeric,positive
Depth or thickness of the sidewalkDepth
398 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
NoneStringName of the marked point to be stored at the newlow edge of sidewalk (OPTIONAL)
Mark Inside Point
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusDescriptionTypeParameter
OptionalThis will set the outside edge of proposedsidewalk as start point
AlignmentOutside Edge of Side-walk
OptionalThis will set the outside edge elevation valueof proposed sidewalk
ProfileLeft Gutter Profile
RequiredIf profiles are not supplied for left/right edgeof pavement elevations, then this surface ele-
SurfaceEGTopSurf
vation at that offset will be picked up as eleva-tion value
Output Parameters
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
-2%NumericCross slope of sidewalk in %, measuring inwardsfrom high edge of sidewalk
% Slope
Numeric,positive
Depth or thickness of the sidewalkDepth
Behavior
By default outside edge of sidewalk is located at the attached marked point orat the associated alignment. Similraly elevation is set based on marker pointassociated, or profile or from the surface at that offset.
Once this start point is established,sidewalk structure links are inserted inwardsfrom this point for given width, slope, and depth. If a name is given for MarkInside Point, a marked point is stored at the new low edge of sidwalk.
UrbanReplaceSidewalk | 399
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly starts at the attached point and draws asingle shape with given dimensions, such as width, slope and depth.
NOTE While constructing an assembly, it is recommended that this subassemblybe added at a controlling offset, if there is no previously marked point. Thiscontrolling offset could be at a decent offset from the baseline marker, so that thelayout mode looks like a typical section. However, it is recommended that the userdoesn't have to map this controlling offset to any "alignment/profile" in the corridorstate, as that would cause problems such as making the design not perpendicularto the baseline in some cases. Not associating this controlling offset will not haveany effect on the corridor, as the start point is attached to an alignment/markedpoint through the subassembly macro for an exact location.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Inside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_InP1
Outside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_OutP2
Top SidewalkL1
DatumL2
Sidewalk concrete areaSidewalkS1
400 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Coding Diagram
UrbanSidewalkThis subassembly inserts links for a concrete sidewalk with inside and outsidegrass boulevards.
Attachment
The attachment point is at the inside edge of the inside boulevard. TheUrbanSidewalk subassembly is typically attached to a back-of-curb or edge ofpavement.
UrbanSidewalk | 401
Input Parameters
Note: All dimensions are in meters or feet unless otherwise noted. All slopesare in run-over-rise form (for example, 4 : 1) unless indicated as a percentslope with a “%” sign.
DefaultTypeDescriptionParameter
RightLeft/RightSpecifies which side to place the subassemblySide
0.0Numeric,positive
Width of the inside grass boulevardInside BoulevardWidth
1.5 mNumeric,positive,
Width of the concrete sidewalkSidewalk Width5.0 ft
non-zero
0.0Numeric,positive
Width of the outside grass boulevardOutside Boule-vard Width
2 (%)Numeric% slope of the sidewalk and grass strips. Positiveslopes are upwards from the attachment point.
%Slope
0.100 mNumeric,positive
Depth of concrete for the sidewalkDepth0.333 ft
Behavior
The inside grass strip, sidewalk, and outside grass boulevard links are insertedoutward from the attachment point at the given slope. The grass strips canbe omitted by specifying a zero-width.
Optionally, various element widths can be attained by attaching to offsetalignments. Also, the sidewalk cross slope can be derived by tying into anoffset profile.
402 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Runtime Logical Assignments
StatusType of AssignmentTypeParameter
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Inside BoulevardWidth and tie the inside edge-of-sidewalk to anoffset alignment
AlignmentInside BoulevardWidth
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Width of Side-walk and tie the outside edge-of-sidwalk to anoffset alignment
AlignmentSidewalk Width
OptionalMay be used to override the fixed Outside Boule-vard Width with an offset alignment
AlignmentOutside BoulevardWidth
Output Parameters
None.
Layout Mode Operation
In layout mode, this subassembly displays the boulevards and sidewalk basedon the input parameter values given.
Point, Link, and Shape Codes
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Inside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_InP2
Outside edge of sidewalk on finish gradeSidewalk_OutP3
TopL1Datum
TopL2Sidewalk
TopL3
UrbanSidewalk | 403
DescriptionCodePoint / Link
Datum
SidewalkL4 – L6Datum
Sidewalk concrete areaSidewalkS1
Coding Diagram
404 | Chapter 3 Subassembly Reference (continued)
Index
S
subassemblies 3, 5, 8, 11–12, 14, 18, 20, 26, 28, 33, 38, 43, 48, 54, 59, 72, 77, 82, 87, 92, 97, 108, 111, 115, 119, 124, 131, 138, 143, 148, 154, 157, 165, 167, 169, 172, 174, 177, 179, 181, 184, 186, 188, 191, 193, 196, 203, 210, 216, 218, 221, 227, 234, 239, 246, 251, 259, 269, 273, 278, 284, 293, 297, 302, 307, 312, 316, 321, 325, 330, 336, 341, 344, 348, 354, 356, 360, 362, 366, 369, 373, 377, 381, 385, 392, 397, 401
BasicBarrier 3BasicCurb 5BasicCurbAndGutter 8BasicGuardrail 11BasicLane 12BasicLaneTransition 14BasicShoulder 18BasicSideSlopeCutDitch 20BasicSideWalk 26BridgeBoxGirder1 28BridgeBoxGirder2 33Channel 38ChannelParabolicBottom 43DaylightBasin 48DaylightBench 54DaylightGeneral 59DaylightMaxOffset 72DaylightMaxWidth 77DaylightMinOffset 82DaylightMinWidth 87DaylightMultiIntercept 92DaylightStandard 97DaylightToOffset 108DaylightToROW 111GenericPavementStructure 115introduction 3
LaneBrokenBack 119LaneFromTaperedMedian1 124LaneFromTaperedMedian2 131LaneInsideSuper 119, 138LaneOutsideSuper 143LaneOutsideSuperWithWidening148LaneParabolic 154LaneTowardCrown 157LinkMulti 165LinkOffsetAndElevation 167LinkOffsetAndSlope 169LinkOffsetOnSurface 172LinkSlopeAndVerticalDeflection 174LinkSlopesBetweenPoints 177LinkSlopeToElevation 179LinkSlopeToSurface 181LinkToMarkedPoint 184LinkVertical 186LinkWidthAndSlope 188MarkPoint 191MedianDepressed 193MedianDepressedShoulderExt 196MedianDepressedShoulderVert 203MedianFlushWithBarrier 210MedianRaisedConstantSlope 216MedianRaisedWithCrown 218OverlayBrokenBackBetweenEdges221,
227OverlayCrownBetweenEdges 234OverlayMedianAsymmetrical 239OverlayMedianSymmetrical 246OverlayMillAndLevel1 251OverlayMillAndLevel2 259OverlayParabolic 269OverlayWidenMatchSlope 273OverlayWidenMatchSlope2 278OverlayWidenWithSuper 284RailSingle 293RetainWallTapered 297RetainWallTaperedWide 302RetainWallTieToDitch 307RetainWallToLowSide 312
405 | Index
RetainWallVertical 316ShapeTrapezoidal 321ShoulderExtendAll 325ShoulderExtendSubbase 330ShoulderVerticalSubbase 336SideDitch 341SideDitchUShape 344SideDitchWithLid 348SnapToMarkedPoint 354StrippingPavement 356StrippingTopSoil 360
TrenchPipe1 366TrenchWithPipe 362UrbanCurbGutterGeneral 369UrbanCurbGutterValley1 373UrbanCurbGutterValley2 377UrbanCurbGutterValley3 381UrbanReplaceCurbGutter1 385UrbanReplaceCurbGutter2 392UrbanReplaceSidewalk 397UrbanSidewalk 401
406 | Index